Panasonic | SXKN2400 | Operating instructions | Panasonic SXKN2400 Operating Instructions

SX-KN2400
SX-KN2600
KEYBOARD
SX-KN2400 SX-KN2600(ENGLISH)
KEYBOARD
Operating Instructions
SX-KN2400 SX-KN2600
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read these
instructions completely. Please keep this manual for future reference.
Web Site: http://www.panasonic.co.jp/global/
ENGLISH
QQTG0692
Se0203S0
ENGLISH
QQTG0692
01_Caution for AC Mains Lead.fm
2 ページ 2003年3月11日 火曜日 午後12時13分
Caution for AC Mains Lead
(For United Kingdom)
(For the type as shown in figures A
and B)
For your safety, please read the following text
carefully.
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three
pin mains plug for your safety and convenience.
A 5-ampere fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the
fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the
replacement fuse has a rating of 5-ampere and
that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark
or the BSI mark
on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you
must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is
replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug must
not be used until a replacement cover is obtained.
A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from
your local dealer.
WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT EITHER WIRE
TO THE EARTH TERMINAL WHICH IS MARKED
WITH THE LETTER E, BY THE EARTH
SYMBOL
OR COLOURED GREEN OR
GREEN/ YELLOW.
THIS PLUG IS NOT WATERPROOF
—KEEP DRY.
Before use
Remove the connector cover.
How to replace the fuse
The location of the fuse differ according to the type
of AC mains plug (figures A and B). Confirm the
AC mains plug fitted and follow the instructions
below. Illustrations may differ from actual AC
mains plug.
1. Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.
Figure A
Figure B
Fuse cover
CAUTION!
IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS
UNSUITABLE FOR THE SOCKET OUTLET IN
YOUR HOME THEN THE FUSE SHOULD BE
REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND
DISPOSED OF SAFELY. THERE IS A
DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK
IF THE CUT OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO
ANY 13-AMPERE SOCKET.
If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the
wiring code as stated below. If in any doubt please
consult a qualified electrician.
IMPORTANT
The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
Blue: Neutral, Brown: Live.
As these colours may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your
plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured Blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter N or coloured Black or Blue.
The wire which is coloured Brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter L or coloured Brown or Red.
2
QQTG0692
2. Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse
cover.
Figure A
Figure B
Fuse
(5 ampere)
Fuse
(5 ampere)
For United Kingdom and Republic of Ireland
www.panasonic.co.uk (for UK customers only)
• Order accessory and consumable items for your
•
•
•
•
product with ease and confidence by telephoning
our Customer Care Centre Mon–Friday
9:00am–5:30pm. (Excluding public holidays.)
Or go on line through our Internet Accessory
ordering application.
Most major credit and debit cards accepted.
All enquiries transactions and distribution facilities
are provided directly by Panasonic UK Ltd.
It couldn’t be simpler!
Customer Care Centre
For UK customers: 08705 357357 For Republic of
Ireland customers: 01 289 8333
Technical Support
For UK customers: 0870 1 505610
This Technical Support Hot Line number is for
Panasonic PC software related products only.
For Republic of Ireland, please use the Customer
Care Centre number listed above for all enquiries.
For all other product related enquiries, please
use the Customer Care Centre numbers listed
above.
07_Part II.fm 48 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分
Part II Playing the rhythm
Overview of rhythm performance
An explanation follows of the terms related to this instrument’s rhythm performance.
Rhythm and accompaniment
pattern
Each rhythm is comprised of not only a DRUMS
pattern, but also of accompaniment patterns
called BASS and ACCOMP. The combination
of all of these is the rhythm.
Playing the rhythm
• The accompaniment pattern sounds when
you perform using the AUTO PLAY CHORD
(APC). (Refer to page 52.).
Rhythm and Style
One rhythm of this instrument is comprised of
four VARIATION patterns, and for each one the
optimum sounds and effects are set.
All of these together comprise one STYLE.
STYLE
RHYTHM
VARIATION 1
PANEL setting
VARIATION 2
PANEL setting
VARIATION 3
PANEL setting
VARIATION 4
PANEL setting
• In the MUSIC STYLIST (page 60) and
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER (page 62) etc.
this STYLE is summoned.
48
QQTG0692
10_Part V.fm 104 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分
Part V Composer
Outline of the Composer
The COMPOSER enables you to create your own accompaniment patterns. A pattern is comprised of 8
parts: DRUMS 1, 2, BASS and ACCOMP1–5 parts. These parts would form the backing of a song.
Rhythm components which can be stored
Different INTRO 1, 2, VARIATION 1 to 4, FILL IN
1, 2 patterns can be created for each MEMORY
(A, B, C).
• Each VARIATION is made of a PATTERN,
FILL 1 and FILL 2.
• A Maj (major) and Min (minor) pattern is available for each of the INTRO and ENDING 1
and 2.
INTRO
VARI 1
VARI 2
VARI 3
VARI 4
ENDING
1 Maj
1 Min
2 Maj
2 Min
PATTERN
FILL IN 1
FILL IN 2
PATTERN
FILL IN 1
FILL IN 2
PATTERN
FILL IN 1
FILL IN 2
PATTERN
FILL IN 1
FILL IN 2
1 Maj
1 Min
2 Maj
2 Min
Memory capacity
Expressed in terms of notes, the total number of
notes which can be stored in all the COMPOSER
memories is about 13,000. The remaining memory available for recording is shown on the
recording display as a percentage (%).
• When “Memory full!” appears on the display
no more data can be stored in the COMPOSER.
Composer
䡲 MEMORY
Because the contents of the MEMORY are
erased after the power is turned off, you should
save the data on disks/SD cards if you wish to
keep it. (Refer to pages 125, 140.)
104
QQTG0692
14_Part IX.fm 155 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時52分
Part IX Reverb & Effect
Outline of the
Reverb & Effect
In the REVERB & EFFECT mode, you can make detailed settings related to this instrument’s effects.
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
on.
PROGRAM
MENUS
• The display looks similar to the following.
Summary of the REVERB & EFFECT
menu items
TONE CONTROL (page 156)
Settings for the entire instrument’s final output sound quality.
REVERB:
REVERB type and detailed settings (page
43)
MULTI:
MULTI EFFECT type and detailed settings
(page 42)
2. Select REVERB & EFFECT.
• The display looks similar to the following.
MIC REVERB & EFFECT:
Settings for the effects that are applied to
MIC. (page 44)
SOUND LOAD OPTION:
Specify whether the various data accompanying a sound, such as effects, are used
when the sound is recalled. (page 153)
3. Select the desired menu.
MIXER:
Use the MIXER display to visually adjust
the major settings of each part. (page 150)
4. Follow the procedures on the corresponding
menu display.
• When the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit,
it indicates that the TEMPO/PROGRAM is
available for setting the current function.
5. When you have finished setting the functions,
press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
off.
155
QQTG0692
Reverb & Effect
CHORUS:
CHORUS type and detailed settings (page
43)
14_Part IX.fm 156 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時52分
Part IX
Tone Control
Settings for the entire instrument’s final output sound quality.
1. On the REVERB & EFFECT display, select
TONE CONTROL.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the BASS ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the
low range and the TREBLE ∧ and ∨ buttons
Reverb & Effect
for the high range.
• Raising the settings excessively may cause
distorted sounds. Lower the setting or the
MAIN VOLUME.
156
QQTG0692
Reverb & Effect
15_Part X.fm 157 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分
Part X Sound Edit
Outline of the Sound Edit
SOUND EDIT enables you to create your own new sound by altering one of the this instrument’s preset
sounds. Your new sound can be stored in one of the sound memory locations. SOUND EDIT has two
methods of use. You can edit in detail using functions more commonly associated with a synthesizer, or
you can use EASY EDIT which allows you to change some basic parameters on one page.
1. Select a sound to edit.
2. Turn on the PROGRAM MENUS button.
PROGRAM
MENUS
• Press the EDITED (or ORIGINAL) button to
switch between the modified sound (EDITED)
and the original sound (ORIGINAL). This
allows you to compare the edited sound to the
original sound as you are modifying it.
Summary of the SOUND EDIT menu items
• The display looks similar to the following.
EASY EDIT (page 158)
The most often used edit functions—such
as brightness and attack speed—are
assembled on one display for easy sound
modification.
TONE (page 159)
Modify the tones which make up the sound.
3. Select SOUND EDIT.
• The display looks similar to the following.
FILTER (page 163)
Adjust the amount of frequency cut in specific frequency ranges.
AMPLITUDE (page 165)
Volume settings.
LFO (page 167)
Cyclic modulation settings.
4. Select the desired menu and follow the procedures on the corresponding setting display.
• To check the sound of a single tone, press the
SOLO button to highlight the SOLO indication.
Only the currently selected tone sounds when
a key is played.
• When the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit,
it indicates that the TEMPO/PROGRAM is
available for setting the current function.
EFFECT (page 168)
Settings related to the various effects
applied to the sound.
CONTROLLER (page 169)
Specify how wheel operation etc. affects
the sound.
5. When the sound is just the way you like it, on
the SOUND EDIT MENU display press the
WRITE button to store your new sound.
157
QQTG0692
Sound Edit
PITCH (page 162)
Adjust the settings related to the pitch.
15_Part X.fm 158 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分
Part X
Sound Edit
• When DRUM KIT sounds are selected and the
SOUND EDIT is activated, the setting display
looks different from that for other sounds, but
the basic operation is the same. (To specify
the percussion instrument you wish to edit,
use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the sound
name, or alternatively, while pressing the keyboard key for the corresponding sound, press
the NOTE SELECT button.)
• To record the DIGITAL DRAWBAR settings,
first adjust the settings, then enter the SOUND
EDIT mode, press the WRITE button and follow the procedure on the display.
Easy Edit
The most commonly used edit functions are consolidated on one display, providing convenient and quick
editing operation.
1. On the SOUND EDIT menu display, select
EASY EDIT.
• The display changes to the following.
Easy Edit items
BRILLIANCE:
Adjust the brightness of the sound.
VIBRATO DEPTH:
Set vibrato depth.
VIBRATO SPEED:
Set vibrato speed.
Sound Edit
2. Use the buttons below the display to specify
the value of the attribute.
• An effect may remain unchanged when EASY
EDIT is used to set the value, if another EDIT
function was first used to set the value to its
upper or lower limit.
3. Press the WRITE button to store your new
sound.
• Storing your new sound is explained on page
169.
• If a sound is stored in the EASY EDIT mode,
and is later selected in the EASY EDIT mode,
the displayed value of an attribute may be different from the value when it was stored. The
sound itself, however, is exactly as it was
stored.
158
QQTG0692
VIBRATO DELAY:
Set time delay between key played and
vibrato start.
OCT SHIFT:
Shift the octave range.
ATTACK:
Adjust attack time.
RELEASE:
Adjust time of sound fade-out after key is
released.
D. EFF:
Select type of effect. (Refer to page 168)
15_Part X.fm 159 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分
Part X
Sound Edit
Tone Edit
Modify the separate tones which comprise the sound.
About tones
A sound may be made up of at most four tones.
1st tone
2nd tone
SOUND
• A special process is used to produce realsounding piano type tones. For this reason,
some edit procedures for piano sounds, FILTER or AMPLITUDE for example, may differ
from those for other sounds.
3rd tone
4th tone
TONE SELECT
1. On the SOUND EDIT menu, select TONE.
7. Use the PANNING MODE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
• The display looks similar to the following.
select mode. (NORMAL, RANDOM, STEREO R, STEREO L)
• If STEREO R or STEREO L is selected for
the MODE, the balance is fixed (cannot be
moved).
8. Use the PAN ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the
select the tone you wish to edit (1st, 2nd, 3rd,
4th).
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting
item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a
selection.
• Use the ON/OFF buttons to select ON or OFF.
3. Select a sound for the tone.
• Use the GROUP ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
group, and the TONE NAME ∧ and ∨ buttons
to select the sound.
• A “∗” mark in the DYNAMICS column indicates that a TONE DYNAMICS change was
made to the sound.
4. Use the LEVEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the
volume.
5. Use the KEY ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the pitch
of the output sound.
6. Use the DETUNE ∧ and ∨ buttons for fine
adjustment of the pitch deviation.
9. Use the DELAY ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust
the delay time of the sound.
• The higher the number, the longer the delay
before sound output.
10. Use the TRIGGER ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
a trigger mode.
KEY ON:
The normal mode, in which sound is emitted
when the key is played.
KEY OFF:
Sound is emitted when the key is released
(like muted strings, for example).
LEGATO:
Sound is emitted only when the key is played
legato.
NON LEG:
Sound is not emitted when the key is played
legato.
159
QQTG0692
Sound Edit
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
stereo balance.
• CTR is the center point. At L64, the sound is
all the way to the left, at R63 all the way to
the right.
15_Part X.fm 160 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分
Part X
Sound Edit
PEDAL:
The sound is produced only while the SUSTAIN button is on.
KEY LAYER
CHORD:
The sound is emphasized when chords are
played (like the cutting sound of a guitar, for
example).
1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 2/4 display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
Adjust the relation of tone output to keyboard
location.
䡲 TONE COPY
You can copy the tone of a particular sound to a
specified tone in the sound you are editing.
1. On the 1/4 display, press the TONE COPY
button.
2. Use the FROM ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
tone to copy from.
• Use the OPTION ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
item you wish to copy.
3. Use the TO ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the tone
you wish to copy to.
4. Press the OK button.
• Tone copy is executed.
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a tone (1st, 2nd, 3rd or 4th).
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting
item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a
selection.
3. Use the L-FADE ∧ and ∨ buttons and the
LOW ∧ and ∨ buttons to define the area of the
lower range of tone output.
• By entering different values for the L-FADE
and LOW settings, you can define a sloping
volume increase to the peak output volume
which corresponds to the note pitch.
4. Use the HIGH ∧ and ∨ buttons and the HFADE ∧ and ∨ buttons to define the area of
Sound Edit
the higher range of tone output.
• By entering different values for the H-FADE
and HIGH settings, you can define a sloping
volume decrease from the peak output which
corresponds to the note pitch.
• By overlapping the L-FADE and H-FADE
curves of each different tone, you can achieve
a cross-fade effect, where the sound gradually
changes in relation to pitch.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the other tones, as
desired.
160
QQTG0692
15_Part X.fm 161 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分
Part X
Sound Edit
VELOCITY LAYER
TONE DYNAMICS
Adjust these settings to regulate the tone output
relative to the velocity.
You can adjust the settings so that a different
sound (tone) is output for each tone depending
on the velocity (how hard the keys are played).
1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 3/4 display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 4/4 display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
3. Use the L-FADE ∧ and ∨ buttons and the
LOW ∧ and ∨ buttons to define the pp sound
output area for the lower range.
4. Use the HIGH ∧ and ∨ buttons and the HFADE ∧ and ∨ buttons to define the ff sound
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a tone.
3. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the column for the function you wish to adjust.
4. Select the tone waveform.
• Use the GR ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
sound group. Use the TONE WAVEFORM ∧
and ∨ buttons to select the waveform.
output area for the higher range.
• By overlapping the L-FADE and H-FADE
curves of each different tone, you can change
the way the tone sounds relative to how hard
or softly the keyboard is played.
5. Use the LEV ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the volume. Use the FLT ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the other tones, as
the velocity range.
• When the upper limit of a waveform is set to
127, no more waveforms can be added.
desired.
sound.
6. Use the VELOCITY ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 to edit the other waveforms, as desired.
8. Repeat steps 2 to 7 for the other tones, as
desired.
161
QQTG0692
Sound Edit
select a tone (1st, 2nd, 3rd or 4th).
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting
item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a
selection.
15_Part X.fm 162 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分
Part X
Sound Edit
Pitch Edit
Adjust the settings related to the pitch of the sound.
KEY SHIFT & DETUNE
1. On the SOUND EDIT menu display, select
PITCH.
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Use the RIGHT SPLIT ∧ and ∨ buttons to set
the octave of the right part when the keyboard
is split.
4. Use the LEFT SPLIT ∧ and ∨ buttons to set
the octave of the left part when the keyboard
is split.
PITCH ENVELOPE
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a tone (1st, 2nd, 3rd or 4th).
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting
item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a
selection.
Specify how the pitch changes over time, from
the time the key is played to the time the sound
dies out.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 3/4 display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Use the KEY SHIFT ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the output pitch.
• Units are in semitones.
4. Use the DETUNE ∧ and ∨ buttons to fine-
Sound Edit
adjust the pitch.
• Slight differences in the DETUNE values
between the tones add fullness to the sound.
5. Use the TONE SCALE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
select the type of scale (NORMAL, 1/2, 1/4,
1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64, FIX).
• NORMAL is the normal scale type. For example, when 1/2 is selected, a difference in pitch
between one key and the adjacent key
becomes half the normal pitch difference.
When FIX is selected, the pitch is the same
regardless of which key is played.
KEYBOARD OCTAVE
1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 2/4 display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a tone.
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting
item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a
selection.
3. Adjust the settings for the pitch change envelope.
• Use the buttons below the display to set the
corresponding values. The envelope is created on the display as you input the settings.
• Use the TOTAL DEPTH ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the maximum level.
• Use the START PITCH ∧ and ∨ buttons to set
the start point. Use the STOP PITCH ∧ and ∨
buttons to set the stop point.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other tones, as
desired.
2. Use the OCT SHIFT ∧ and ∨ buttons to set
the octave of the sound.
162
QQTG0692
15_Part X.fm 163 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分
Part X
Sound Edit
PITCH ENVELOPE TOUCH & KEY FOLLOW
Specify how the pitch envelope changes in relation to note pitch.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 4/4 display.
• At a − setting, the softer the keys are pressed,
the greater the change. At a + setting, the
harder the keys are pressed, the greater the
change.
4. Change the key follow settings for the
ATTACK, DECAY and RELEASE.
• Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons corresponding to the
ENVELOPE KEY FOLLOW attributes to
adjust the settings. Use the CENTER ∧ and ∨
buttons to select the center of the bend direction.
2. Use the buttons to left of the display to select a
tone.
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting
item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a
selection.
3. Use the TOUCH ∧ and ∨ buttons to change
the respective touch settings.
• Use the TIME ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
time change depending on touch. Use the
LEVEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the pitch
change level depending on touch.
Filter Edit
Make major changes to the sound by eliminating specific frequency ranges.
1. On the SOUND EDIT menu, select FILTER.
• The display looks similar to the following.
HPF(6)+EQ (high-pass filter + equalizer)
Signals lower than the cut-off frequency are
cut. Normal sounds are sharpened.
LPF24 (low-pass filter 24)
A stronger low-pass filter than LPF+EQ.
HPF24 (high-pass filter 24)
A stronger high-pass filter than HPF+EQ.
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a tone.
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting
item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a
selection.
3. Use the MODE button to select the filter mode.
LPF(6)+EQ (low-pass filter + equalizer)
Signals higher than the cut-off frequency are
cut. Normal sounds are softened.
BPF (band-pass filter)
Cuts off signals that are not within in the area
between the two specified CUTOFF frequencies.
• For this mode, adjust the settings on the
EQUALIZER/FILTER side as well.
THRU
No filter effect is applied.
163
QQTG0692
Sound Edit
FILTER & EQUALIZER
15_Part X.fm 164 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分
Part X
4. Use the CUTOFF ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the
frequency range which is cut by the filter.
5. Use the RESONANCE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the resonance value (dB).
• Resonance is effect which adds character to
the sound by emphasizing the harmonic components of frequencies close to the cut-off
frequency.
Sound Edit
<Equalizer>
For LPF(6)+EQ/HPF(6)+EQ filters, the sound
quality can be modified by the EQUALIZER.
RANGE
Select the setting range (HIGH or LOW).
FREQUENCY
Set the standard frequency.
GAIN
Set the level increase or decrease from the
value set for FREQ (dB).
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for each tone, as desired.
TOUCH & KEY FOLLOW
FILTER ENVELOPE
Adjust how the filter is applied relative to touch
and pitch.
Specify how the filter changes over time, from
the time the key is played to the time the sound
dies out.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 2/4 display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
1. Use the PAGE buttons view the 3/4 display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
Sound Edit
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a tone.
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting
item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a
selection.
3. Modify how the respective filters are applied
relative to key touch.
• Use the TOUCH CUT OFF ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the amount of change in the cut-off frequency. Use the TOUCH CURVE ∧ and ∨
buttons to specify the curve of change. Use
the TOUCH RESONANCE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the degree of change in the resonance
value.
4. Modify how the respective filters are applied
relative to note pitch.
• Use the KEY FOLLOW SLOPE ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the bend slope. Use the KEY
FOLLOW RANGE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify
the pitch range.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the other tones, as
desired.
164
QQTG0692
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a tone.
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting
item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a
selection.
3. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to modify the respective filter envelopes.
• Use the buttons below the display to adjust the
respective settings.
• You can use the CUTOFF ADJUST buttons to
set the total upper and lower settings, the
START POINT buttons to set the start point,
and the STOP POINT buttons to set the stop
point.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other tones, as
desired.
15_Part X.fm 165 ページ 2003年2月7日 金曜日 午後3時19分
Part X
FILTER ENVELOPE TOUCH & KEY
FOLLOW
Specify how the filter envelope (curve) changes
relative to touch or note pitch.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 4/4 display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
Sound Edit
3. Modify how the respective filter envelopes
change relative to touch.
• Use the TOUCH TIME ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the time change, and the TOUCH
LEVEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the level,
relative to touch.
• At a − setting, the softer the keys are played,
the greater the change. At a + setting, the
harder the keys are played, the greater the
change.
4. Use the KEY FOLLOW ∧ and ∨ buttons to
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a tone.
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting
item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a
selection.
modify how the respective filter envelopes
change relative to note pitch.
• Adjust the respective slopes for attack, decay
and release. Use the CENTER ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the center of the bend slope by
note name.
Amplitude Edit
Adjust the settings related to the volume of the sound.
LEVEL
TUDE.
• The display looks similar to the following.
5. Use the CURVE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
type of volume curve depending on touch.
6. Change the respective key follow settings.
• Use the KEY FOLLOW SLOPE ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the bend slope. Use the KEY
FOLLOW RANGE (1–3) ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the pitch range by note name.
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 for the other tones, as
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
desired.
select a tone.
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting
item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a
selection.
3. Use the LEVEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
volume.
4. Use the TOUCH ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the
amount of volume change in relation to how
hard the keyboard is played.
• At a − value, the softer the keyboard is played,
the louder the sound. At a + value, the harder
the keyboard is played, the louder the sound.
165
QQTG0692
Sound Edit
1. On the SOUND EDIT menu, select AMPLI-
15_Part X.fm 166 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分
Part X
Sound Edit
ENVELOPE
ENVELOPE TOUCH & KEY FOLLOW
Specify how the volume changes over time, from
the time the key is played to the time the sound
dies out.
Specify how the volume changes relative to
touch or note pitch over time.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 3/3 display.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 2/3 display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a tone.
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting
item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a
selection.
3. Adjust the settings for the volume envelope.
• Use the buttons below the display to set the
corresponding values. The envelope is created on the display as you input the settings.
• Use the SUSTAIN PEDAL ∧ and ∨ buttons to
select the type of sustain.
Sound Edit
LONG:
Extend the release time of the sound.
HOLD:
Maintain the key-pressed condition.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other tones, as
desired.
166
QQTG0692
select a tone.
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting
item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a
selection.
3. Change the touch settings.
• Use the TOUCH ATTACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the ATTACK time change depending
on touch. Use the TOUCH DECAY ∧ and ∨
buttons to specify the DECAY time change
depending on touch.
• At a − setting, the softer the keys are pressed,
the greater the change. At a + setting, the
harder the keys are pressed, the greater the
change.
4. Change the key follow settings for the
ATTACK, DECAY and RELEASE.
• Use the RANGE buttons to specify the keyboard range.
15_Part X.fm 167 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分
Part X
Sound Edit
LFO Edit
LFO can be applied to the pitch, amplitude, filter and/or pan to produce a cyclic modulation of the sound.
• Twelve LFO groups can be used.
LFO
1. On the SOUND EDIT MENU display, select
LFO.
• The display looks similar to the following.
6. Use the TONE SETTINGS ∧ and ∨ buttons to
adjust the respective parameters.
PHASE
Phase
• A + indicates normal phase, and a − indicates
an inverted phase.
characteristics.
PAGE 1/4: PITCH (vibrato effect)
PAGE 2/4: AMPLITUDE (tremolo effect)
PAGE 3/4: FILTER (wah-wah effect)
PAGE 4/4: PANNING (auto pan effect)
3. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a tone.
4. Adjust the respective assigned LFO’s.
• LFO which share the same number on other
displays are also changed with this adjustment.
SELECT
Select the assigned LFO number (1 to 12)
SPEED
Adjust the modulation speed.
DELAY
Delay time is the time elapsed from when the
keyboard key is pressed until the modulation
begins.
DEPTH
Modulation depth
TOUCH
Degree of modulation change in relation to
touch
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 for the other tones, as
desired.
• You can press the OVERVIEW button to confirm the status of each LFO setting.
KEYSYNC
When playing more than one note, specify
whether the LFO starts or not each time a key
is pressed (ON/OFF).
• When KEYSYNC is set to ON: if, while playing
one note, you play a second note, the LFO is
applied to the second note as well.
PHASE
Degree of phase change.
5. Use the CONNECTION buttons to specify
whether or not the LFO is applied to the tone.
• An arrow mark indicates that the LFO is
applied.
167
QQTG0692
Sound Edit
2. Use the PAGE buttons to select the respective
WAVE
Modulate the waveform.
SINE: Sine wave
TRIANGLE: Triangle wave
SQUARE: Square wave
SAW TOOTH: Saw tooth wave
RANDOM: Irregular pattern
15_Part X.fm 168 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分
Part X
Sound Edit
Effect Edit
These are settings related to the various effects applied to your edited sound.
EFFECT
1. On the SOUND EDIT menu display, select
䡲 DIGITAL EFFECT
1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 2/2 display.
EFFECT.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• The display for the effect type which is bestsuited for the sound currently being edited is
selected.
2. Use the CHORUS ON/OFF buttons set CHORUS to on or off. Use the respective DEPTH ∧
and ∨ buttons to specify how the CHORUS is
2. Use the TYPE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
type of effect.
applied.
3. Use the REVERB ADJUST ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify how the REVERB is applied.
4. Use the MONO/POLY ∧ and ∨ buttons to
select the sound output mode.
5. Use the PORTAMENTO ON/OFF buttons set
portamento to on or off. Use the TIME ∧ and ∨
buttons to set the portamento time.
<ON/OFF button>
Specify whether the DIGITAL EFFECT button
turns on or off when the sound is selected.
When set to ON, the DIGITAL EFFECT button
turns on automatically when the sound is
selected.
<STEREO/MONO button>
Select stereo (STEREO) or monaural (MONO)
output of the effect.
3. Use the buttons along the bottom of the dis-
Sound Edit
play to select the attribute you wish to adjust.
• When the type is changed, the parameters
revert to the factory defaults.
168
QQTG0692
15_Part X.fm 169 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分
Part X
Sound Edit
Controller Edit
Specify how operation of the controllers, such as the wheels, etc., affects the sound.
CONTROLLER
1. On the SOUND EDIT menu display, select
5. Use the ON/OFF ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the
CONTROLLER.
• The display looks similar to the following.
controller to on or off for each tone.
• When set to INV, the effect is applied
inversely.
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for the other controllers,
as desired.
7. Use the GLIDE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
whether or not the glide effect is active.
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a controller.
• Two functions can be assigned to each controller.
3. Use the FUNCTION ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
a function for the controller.
ENABLE:
The glide effect is enabled.
DISABLE:
The glide effect is disabled.
• To assigning a function to the foot switch, refer
to page 172.
4. Use the DEPTH∧ and ∨ buttons to set the
depth of the function applied by the controller.
The MEMORY button in the SOUND GROUP section accesses memory banks reserved for the sounds
you create with the SOUND EDIT. You can store up to 40 original sounds then select the sounds just like
the other sounds in the SOUND GROUP.
Procedure
1. When you have edited the sound to just the
2. To assign a name to your new sound, press
way you like it, on the SOUND EDIT menu display press the WRITE button.
• The display changes to the MEMORY WRITE
display.
the SOUND NAMING button.
• If you do not assign a name to your sound, the
name becomes the same as the original
sound from which you started. In this case,
skip to step 5.
• The display changes to the SOUND NAMING
display.
169
QQTG0692
Sound Edit
Store the new sound
15_Part X.fm 170 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時55分
Part X
3. Use the buttons below the display to assign a
•
•
•
•
•
•
name.
Set the character input position with the POSITION buttons, select the characters with the
alphanumeric buttons and repeat name
assignment.
Switch from upper to lower case letters with
the ABC, abc button.
Press the INS button to enter a space at the
cursor position.
Press the DEL button to erase the character at
the cursor position.
Press the CLR button to erase the entire
name.
Press the →← button to center the name.
4. When you have finished typing the name,
press the OK button.
• The display returns to the MEMORY WRITE
display.
5. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the MEMORY number in which to store the new sound
(1–40).
6. Press the OK button.
• The new sound is stored, and “COMPLETED!”
is shown on the display.
• The SOUND EDIT mode is turned off.
Sound Edit
• The stored sound memories can be saved on
a disk/an SD card for recall at a later time.
(Refer to pages 125, 140.)
170
QQTG0692
Sound Edit
Select a new sound
You can select your original sound just like the
other sounds in the SOUND GROUP.
1. In the SOUND GROUP section, press the
MEMORY button.
MEMORY
• The list of sounds is shown on the display.
2. Select the desired sound from the list on the
display.
16_Part XI.fm 171 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時55分
Part XI Control
Outline of Control functions
Various settings related to the operation of this instrument are adjusted with the CONTROL functions.
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
on.
PROGRAM
MENUS
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER MODE
Define which panel settings change by pressing a FILL IN button when the MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER is used. (Refer to page 63.)
FADE IN/OUT SETTING
Settings related to the FADE IN/FADE OUT.
(Refer to page 58.)
• The display looks similar to the following.
4. Follow the procedure to adjust the settings.
• While you are adjusting the settings, when the
TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit, it indicates
that the TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for
setting the current function.
5. When you have finished setting the functions,
press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
off.
2. Select CONTROL.
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Select a function.
Control
INITIAL
Return the settings and memories to the
factory-preset status. (Refer to page 186.)
OVERALL TOUCH SENSITIVITY (page 172)
Adjust the amount of keyboard touch
response.
FOOT CONTROLLERS (page 172)
Assign functions to the separately sold Foot
Switch and Foot Controller, etc.
PANEL MEMORY MODE
Define which panel settings are stored when
the PANEL MEMORY is used. (Refer to page
66.)
171
QQTG0692
16_Part XI.fm 172 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時55分
Part XI
Control
Overall Touch Sensitivity
This instrument features INITIAL TOUCH (the volume, for example, changes depending on how hard the
keyboard is played).
1. On the CONTROL MENU display, select
OVERALL TOUCH SENSITIVITY.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the amount
of keyboard touch response (0 to 9).
• When set to 0, initial touch sensitivity is turned
off.
Foot Controllers
If an optional Foot Switch and/or Expression Pedal (sold separately) is connected, you can assign it one
of several functions, allowing convenient and fast control during your performance.
1. On the CONTROL MENU display, select
FOOT CONTROLLERS.
• The display looks similar to the following.
䡲 FOOT SWITCH
OFF:
No function is assigned.
SOFT PEDAL:
Soft on/off
Control
SOSTENUTO PEDAL:
Sostenuto on/off
2. Use the CONTROLLER ▲ and ▼ buttons to
select a switch name, and the FUNCTION ∧
and ∨ buttons to select its function.
P. MEM INCREMENT:
Increment the PANEL MEMORY number
selection by 1.
P. MEM DECREMENT:
Decrement the PANEL MEMORY number
selection by 1.
P. MEM BANK INC.:
Change to the next PANEL MEMORY bank in
order.
P. MEM BANK DEC.:
Change to the previous PANEL MEMORY
bank in order.
172
QQTG0692
16_Part XI.fm 173 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時55分
Part XI
PANEL MEMORY 1 to 8:
The specified PANEL MEMORY number is
turned on.
Control
FADE IN:
FADE IN button on/off
FADE OUT:
FADE OUT button on/off
P. MEM INC.+DEC.:
Press the switch to increment the PANEL
MEMORY number selection by one; release
the switch to return to the previous number.
PAD 1 to 6:
Specified PERFORMANCE PADS on
START/STOP:
START/STOP button on/off
TAP TEMPO:
TAP TEMPO button on.
FILL IN 1:
FILL IN 1 button on
䡲 EXPRESS. PEDAL
TOTAL EXPRESSION:
The volume for all parts changes when the
expression pedal is operated.
FILL IN 2:
FILL IN 2 button on
INTRO & ENDING 1:
INTRO & ENDING 1 button on
INTRO & ENDING 2:
INTRO & ENDING 2 button on
PART EXPRESSION:
The volume changes only for parts for which
PART EXP PEDAL was turned ON on the
PART SETTING display for SOUND. (Refer to
page 148.)
• The initialized settings are as follows:
SUSTAIN:
SUSTAIN button on/off
GLIDE:
Glide on/off (The glide effect “bends” the pitch
down by about one semitone.)
FOOT SWITCH
SUSTAIN
EXPRESS. PEDAL
TOTAL EXPRESSION
• For connection of a Foot Switch, etc., refer to
page 188.
TECHNI-CHORD:
TECHNI-CHORD button on/off
DIGITAL EFFECT:
DIGITAL EFFECT button on/off
MULTI EFFECT:
MULTI EFFECT button on/off
ROTARY SLOW/FAST:
TREMOLO SLOW/FAST of the DIGITAL
DRAWBAR
Control
MIC REVERB:
MIC REVERB button on
MIC EFFECT:
MIC EFFECT button on
PUNCH RECORD:
Punch in/punch out
APC HOLD:
Memorize the chord specified for the automatic accompaniment.
173
QQTG0692
17_Part XII.fm 174 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時58分
Part XII Customize
Outline of Customize functions
Many of this instrument’s settings can be customized for maximum playing convenience and ease.
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
on.
• The display looks similar to the following.
DISK PREFERENCES (KN2400)
Automatic display when a floppy disk is
inserted (page 130).
SD PREFERENCES (KN2600)
Specify the desired priority of displays when
the LOAD button is pressed on the control
panel (page 145).
4. Follow the procedure to adjust the settings.
2. Select CUSTOMIZE.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• While you are adjusting the settings, when the
TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit, it indicates
that the TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for
setting the current function.
5. When you have finished setting the functions,
press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
off.
(KN2400)
3. Select a function.
FAVORITES SETTING
FAVORITES display settings (page 33)
DISPLAY TIME OUT (page 175)
Adjust settings related to the screen display.
DATA PROTECTION (page 176)
Specify when you don’t want the data to
change in cases where it normally does, for
instance during disk load and when automatic
settings are made, etc.
Customize
MIDI SETTING LOAD OPTION (page 176)
Specify how MIDI data is handled when data
is loaded from a disk.
LANGUAGE SETTING
Select your preferred language for the displayed messages.
• The display is different, but the operation is
the same as for HELP (page 33).
174
QQTG0692
17_Part XII.fm 175 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時58分
Part XII
Customize
Display Time Out
Numerous message displays and setting displays conveniently guide you through the operation steps of
this instrument. Once you become familiar with the operation of your instrument, however, you may wish
to shorten or even suspend the display time of the message displays.
1. On the CUSTOMIZE display, select DISPLAY
TIME OUT.
• The display looks similar to the following.
4. Press the OK button.
• Some messages may be displayed even if
they are set to OFF.
2. Use the DISPLAY TYPE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
select the function.
SAVE REMINDER:
Reminder display (OFF, DEFAULT, HOLD, 1
to 10 sec)
‘COMPLETED’ MESSAGE:
Operation successfully completed
DEFAULT, HOLD, 1 to 10 sec)
(OFF,
ARE YOU SURE?:
Display requires user action for confirmation
(OFF, DEFAULT, HOLD)
ERROR MESSAGE:
Error notification display (DEFAULT, HOLD, 1
to 10 sec)
SOUND/RHYTHM SELECT:
Sound/rhythm and PERFORMANCE PADS
BANK selection display (DEFAULT, HOLD, 1
to 10 sec)
EASY SETTING:
Display time when the setting display was
accessed pressing and holding a panel button
(DEFAULT, HOLD, 1 to 10 sec)
Customize
• When set the OFF, the display will not appear.
• When set to DEFAULT, the display time
returns to the initialized setting.
• You can specify 1 to 10 seconds for the display time.
• When set to HOLD, the DISPLAY HOLD automatically turns on.
3. Use the TIME ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the
setting.
175
QQTG0692
17_Part XII.fm 176 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時58分
Part XII
Customize
Data Protection
Data which you don’t want to change but which is normally overwritten during disk load, song change, or
the automatic setting functions, etc. can be protected from accidental overwriting.
1. In the CUSTOMIZE MENU display, select
3. Use the ON/OFF button to select ON or OFF.
DATA PROTECTION.
• The display looks similar to the following.
ON:
The data is protected and will not be
changed.
OFF:
The data is not retained.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each item.
2. Use the ITEM ∧ and ∨ buttons to select an
item.
5. Press the OK button.
MIDI Setting Load Option
Specify how MIDI data is handled when data is loaded from a disk.
1. On the CUSTOMIZE MENU display, select
MIDI SETTING LOAD OPTION.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select an item.
䡲 Load MIDI Parameters?
From Registration file:
Specify whether MIDI data is also loaded
when panel data is loaded (NO/YES).
From Sequencer Song:
Specify whether MIDI data is loaded or
changed when SEQUENCER data is loaded
or when the SONG is changed by the
SEQUENCER SONG SELECT, SONG COPY
or TRACK ASSIGN (NO/YES).
• The MIDI settings are always stored at the
start of each recorded SEQUENCER SONG
and when PANEL WRITE is executed. In the
initialized state, the MIDI settings are not
loaded even when the SONG is changed.
However, changing this setting to YES will
cause the stored MIDI settings to also load in
these cases.
䡲 Use these settings when:
GM2 mode ON:
Specify how the MIDI settings of this instrument are affected when GM2 is on.
• Select from INITIAL, (initialized settings),
PRESET (MIDI PRESETS), and KEEP (the
settings do not change).
NX SOUND mode ON:
Specify how the MIDI settings of this instrument are affected when NX SOUND is ON.
• Select from INITIAL, (initialized settings),
PRESET (MIDI PRESETS), and KEEP (the
settings do not change).
3. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the set-
Customize
ting.
4. Press the OK button.
176
QQTG0692
18_Part XIII.fm
177 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時0分
Part XIII MIDI
What is MIDI?
MIDI terminals
(On the rear panel)
OUT
IN
IN:
The terminal by which this instrument receives
data from other equipment.
OUT:
The terminal that transmits data from this
instrument to other equipment.
MIDI
• For these connections, use a commercially
available MIDI cable.
Connection examples
䡲 To generate sound from a connected instrument by playing this instrument
OUT
MIDI cable
This instrument
IN
Another MIDI instrument
䡲 To generate sound from this instrument by operating a connected instrument
IN
MIDI cable
This instrument
OUT
Another MIDI instrument
䡲 To connect with a MIDI sequencer
OUT
IN
This instrument
MIDI cable
OUT
IN
Another MIDI instrument
177
QQTG0692
MIDI
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is the international standard for digital communication of electronic musical instrument data. This means that any equipment which has a MIDI terminal—such as electronic musical instruments and personal computers—can easily exchange digital data with other MIDI
equipment without resorting to complicated conversions or connections.
18_Part XIII.fm
178 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時0分
Part XIII
MIDI
MIDI channels
Many different kinds of performance data are
sent using just one MIDI cable. This is possible
because MIDI signals are sent and received
through 16 different “basic channels” (numbered
1 to 16). In order for the exchange of data to take
place, the channels on the transmission side
must match the channels on the receiving side.
This characteristic also makes it possible to link
multiple sound generators and to control each by
matching specific channels.
The following kinds of data can be transmitted/received.
䡲 NOTE data
This is the most basic kind of MIDI data which is
exchanged, and is used to specify which keys
are played and how hard they are played.
NOTE NUMBER: Number specifying which key
is played.
NOTE ON: Specifies that a key is played.
NOTE OFF: Specifies that a key is released.
VELOCITY: Specifies how hard a key is struck.
• MIDI notes are assigned numbers from 0 to
127, with middle C (C3) as 60. Note pitches
are in semitone increments, with the higher
numbers assigned to the higher pitches.
䡲 PROGRAM CHANGE
This is sound change data. When a different
sound is selected on the transmitting instrument,
the sound on the receiving instrument also
changes.
䡲 CONTROL CHANGE
These are volume, sustain, effect, etc. data used
to enhance performance expression. Each function is distinguished by its control number, and
the function which can be changed by the control
differs depending on the instrument.
䡲 EXCLUSIVE data
This is data that is specific to this instrument, and
data for the GENERAL MIDI LEVEL 2 mode setting.
178
QQTG0692
MIDI
18_Part XIII.fm
179 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時0分
Part XIII
MIDI
Outline of MIDI functions
3. Select a function.
on.
4. Follow the procedure to adjust the settings.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• While you are adjusting the settings, when the
TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit, it indicates
that the TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for
setting the current function.
5. When you have finished setting the functions,
press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
off.
2. Select MIDI.
• The display looks similar to the following.
Summary of the MIDI menu items
PART SETTING (page 180)
Set the MIDI CHANNEL, OCTAVE and
LOCAL CONTROL settings for each part.
CONTROL MESSAGES (page 181)
Enable or disable the exchange of various
CONTROL data.
REALTIME MESSAGES (page 181)
Enable or disable the exchange of REALTIME COMMANDS, and select the CLOCK
mode.
COMMON SETTING (page 182)
Set the functions which are common to all
parts.
MIDI PRESETS (page 184)
Establish the optimum settings depending
on how this instrument is connected to
other equipment.
• You can save the settings you specify yourself.
MODE SETTING (page 183)
NX SOUND and GM LEVEL 2 ON setting
COMPUTER CONNECTION (page 185)
Mode settings related to the flow of MIDI
signals when this instrument is connected
to a personal computer.
INPUT/OUTPUT SETTING (page 183)
Settings which determine how various performance data is treated during data transmission and reception.
179
QQTG0692
MIDI
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
18_Part XIII.fm
180 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時0分
Part XIII
MIDI
Part Setting
MIDI
Follow this procedure to set the functions which can be set for each part: MIDI CHANNELs, the OCTAVE
data to NOTE data during transmission, and LOCAL CONTROL (whether or not the sound generator of
this instrument is active during transmission).
1. On the MIDI MENU display, select PART
4. Use the OCTAVE ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the
SETTING.
• The display looks similar to the following.
octave shift value (−3 to 3).
• Octave shift is set for transmitted data only;
however the transmitted and received octave
shifts are linked. For example, if the transmitted octave shift is set to 1, the received octave
shift is automatically set to −1.
5. Use the LOCAL ∧ and ∨ buttons to enable or
part.
• The list of parts covers 4 pages. Use the
OTHER PARTS/TR button or PAGE button to
view different parts.
disable this instrument’s sound generator.
• When set to ON, the performance from this
instrument is transmitted as MIDI data and
also sounds from this instrument. When set to
OFF, the performance from this instrument is
transmitted as MIDI data but does not sound
from this instrument.
3. Use the CHANNEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for each part as desired.
2. Use the PART ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a
a MIDI CHANNEL for the part (OFF, 1 to 16).
• A part which has been set to OFF cannot be
used to transmit or receive MIDI data.
• The initialized settings are as follows:
RIGHT 1
RIGHT 2
LEFT
PART 1
PART 2
PART 3
PART 4
PART 5
PART 6
PART 7
PART 8
PART 9
PART 10
PART 11
PART 12
PART 13
PART 14
PART 15
PART 16
CONTROL
ACCOMP 1 – 5
BASS
DRUMS 1 – 2
CHORD
180
QQTG0692
1
2
3
OFF
OFF
OFF
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
18_Part XIII.fm
181 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時0分
Part XIII
MIDI
Control Messages
Enable or disable the exchange of various control data.
MESSAGES.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• The CONTROL MESSAGES display consists
of 3 pages. Use the PAGE buttons to switch
between pages.
2. Use the MESSAGE ▲ and ▼ buttons to select
the control message.
3. Use the ON and OFF ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify on or off for the control message.
ON:
Data for the control operation is exchanged.
OFF:
Data for the control operation is not
exchanged.
• The BANK SELECT setting is effective only
when PRG. CHANGE is set to ON.
• The EFFECT & REVERB setting controls the
DIGITAL EFFECT, CHORUS, MULTI and
REVERB on/off.
• RPN is the general term for KEY SHIFT,
TUNING, PITCH BEND RANGE and MODULATION SENSITIVITY.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each control as
desired.
Realtime Messages
Enable or disable the exchange of START/STOP data (REALTIME COMMANDS), and select the CLOCK
mode.
1. On the MIDI MENU display, select REALTIME
MESSAGES.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the buttons on the left side of the display
to select a function.
3. Use the VALUE ∧ and ∨ buttons to change
the setting.
REALTIME COMMANDS
ON:
Rhythm and SEQUENCER start/stop, continue, and song position pointer data can be
transmitted/received.
OFF:
This data cannot be transmitted/received.
CLOCK
INTERNAL:
This instrument’s internal clock is used to
control the perform-ance. The clock of the
connected equipment is disabled.
MIDI:
The clock of the connected equipment is
used to control the performance. This
instrument’s clock is disabled. (The tempo
is displayed as “q = − − −.”)
• The CLOCK is set to INTERNAL when the
power to this instrument is turned on.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other function if
desired.
181
QQTG0692
MIDI
1. On the MIDI MENU display, select CONTROL
18_Part XIII.fm
182 ページ
2003年3月6日 木曜日 午後1時36分
Part XIII
MIDI
Common Setting
Set the functions which are common to all parts.
1. On the MIDI MENU display, select COMMON
MIDI
SETTING.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the item.
NOTE ONLY:
Of the performance data, specify whether or
not only note data is exchanged.
PROGRAM CHANGE TO P. MEM:
Enable or disable the exchange of program
change numbers for the RIGHT 1 part by
operation of the PANEL MEMORY buttons.
• For this setting, the PANEL MEMORY 1 to 8
program change numbers correspond to the
bank numbers as follows:
BANK A = 0 to 7
BANK B = 8 to 15 ...
INTRO, FILL-IN, ENDING:
Enable or disable the exchange of intro, fill-in
and ending data.
APC CONTROL:
Enable the exchange of data for the on/off status of the AUTO PLAY CHORD’s BASIC,
ADVANCED and PIANIST modes.
FADE IN/OUT:
Specify whether or not FADE IN/OUT data is
exchanged.
PROGRAM CHANGE MODE
NX SOUND:
Program change numbers are standardized
among NX SOUND Technics models which
are set to this mode. The program change
number assigned to a given sound on one
model is assigned to the same sound on all
models which are set to the same mode.
PREVIOUS TECH:
Program change numbers are standardized
among non-NX SOUND Technics models
which are set to this mode. The program
change number assigned to a given sound
on one model is assigned to the same
sound on all models which are set to the
same mode.
MAP R:
GS basic sounds are transmitted and
received as GS program change numbers.
MAP Y:
XG basic sounds are transmitted and
received as XG program change numbers.
∗ GS is a trademark of Roland Corporation. XG is a
trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
DRUMS TYPE
NX SOUND:
Keyboard percussion instrument sounds
correspond to the same key note numbers
for connected NX SOUND Technics models
that are set to this type.
PREVIOUS TECH:
Keyboard percussion instrument sounds
correspond to the same key note numbers
for connected non-NX SOUND Technics
models that are set to this type.
SONG SELECT
ON:
Song number data can be exchanged.
OFF:
Song number data cannot be exchanged.
PREVIOUS MODEL MODE
ON:
INTRO, FILL IN, ENDING and APC CONTROL, FADE IN/OUT data are converted to
CONTROL CHANGE data for previous
models ∗ and then transmitted.
OFF:
The above settings are not converted.
∗ “Previous models” include all Technics instrument
models except for:
KN7000/6500/6000
PR604/804/603/703/903/1000
3. Use ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the setting.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other settings as
desired.
182
QQTG0692
18_Part XIII.fm
183 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時0分
Part XIII
MIDI
Mode Setting
1. On the MIDI MENU display, select MODE
2. Select the mode.
SETTING.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• There are two modes for GM LEVEL 2
depending on the parts to use.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the
YES button to execute the function, or press
the NO button to cancel the function.
Input/output Setting
Make the settings which determine how various performance data is treated during data transmission and
reception.
1. On
the MIDI MENU display, select
INPUT/OUTPUT SETTING.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the item.
RIGHT 1 INPUT
CONDUCTOR:
When data for the RIGHT 1 part is received,
the CONDUCTOR determines which part it
is used for.
DIRECT:
When data for the RIGHT 1 part is received,
it is treated as RIGHT 1 data, and performance data for all parts is received on their
respective basic channels.
AUTO PLAY CHORD INPUT
ON: Input data for the ACCOMP, BASS, APC
and CHORD parts is received.
OFF: Data for the above parts is not received.
• MIDI channels should be assigned to the
above parts before exchanging data.
VELOCITY INPUT
DIRECT:
The VELOCITY value of received NOTE
ON data is treated as is.
OFFSET:
The VELOCITY value of received NOTE
ON data is offset (−50 to 50).
• Select VELOCITY OFFSET VALUE. Use
the ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the value.
• All the values are offset from the current
value by the fixed amount.
• The upper (127) and lower (1) limits cannot be exceeded.
FIX:
The VELOCITY value of all received NOTE
ON data is set to a fixed value. (1 to 127)
• Select VELOCITY FIXED VALUE. Use
the ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the value.
TECHNI-CHORD OUTPUT
ON: Keyboard notes generated by the
TECHNI-CHORD function are also transmitted.
OFF: Only key note data of the pressed keys
is transmitted.
TRANSPOSE OUTPUT
ON: The note data of the transposed notes is
transmitted.
OFF: The note data of the played keys is
transmitted.
183
QQTG0692
MIDI
Initialize the settings for when the NX SOUND or GM LEVEL 2 mode is ON.
18_Part XIII.fm
184 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時0分
Part XIII
MIDI
MIDI
DRUM PATTERN OUTPUT
ON: Data from the DRUMS part is transmitted.
OFF: Data from the DRUMS part is not transmitted.
AUTO PLAY CHORD OUTPUT
ON: The data for the ACCOMP and BASS
parts is transmitted.
OFF: The data for the above parts is not transmitted.
• MIDI channels should be assigned to the
above parts before exchanging data.
AUTO OCTAVE SHIFT OUTPUT
ON: If the octave has been automatically
changed, the data of the transposed notes
is transmitted, depending on the sound.
OFF: The note data of the played keys is
transmitted.
3. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the setting.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each item as
desired.
MIDI Presets
Establish the optimum settings depending on how this Keyboard is connected to other equipment, and on
whether this Keyboard is used as the master or the slave.
1. On the MIDI MENU display, select MIDI PRE-
3. Press the OK button.
SETS.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• When the settings have been successfully
stored, “COMPLETED!” appears on the display.
2. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the connection setup.
• The PAGE 1/4 display shows connection setups with this instrument as the SLAVE. And
the PAGE 2/4 display shows connection setups with this instrument as the MASTER.
• The MASTER is the instrument used to transmit data, and the SLAVE is the instrument
used to receive the data.
• Use the buttons below the display to select
WITHOUT APC (the AUTO PLAY CHORD is
not used) or WITH APC (the performance
includes AUTO PLAY CHORD).
184
QQTG0692
Notice
When an instrument such as an organ or
accordion with separate or divided keyboards
dedicated to melody and chords is used as the
master instrument, if this instrument’s split
point is set to a note below the lowest note of
the melody keyboard of the master instrument,
it is possible to produce melody notes on multiple parts by this instrument’s CONDUCTOR
settings.
• Assign the RIGHT 1 channel as the CHANNEL for the melody keyboard. Assign the
CHORD channel (or if you also wish the
played note to be produced, CHORD +
LEFT) as the CHANNEL for the chord keyboard.
• You will also have to specify CONDUCTOR
as the RIGHT 1 INPUT for the INPUT/OUTPUT SETTING.
18_Part XIII.fm
185 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時0分
Part XIII
䡲 Storing user settings
After you change the MIDI settings, you can
store your customized settings in USER.
MIDI
䡲 Recalling the USER settings
1. Go to PAGE 3/4 of the MIDI PRESETS display.
1. Adjust the various MIDI settings.
2. Go to PAGE 4/4 of the MIDI PRESETS disMIDI
play.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Press the OK button.
3. Use the WITH SPLIT POINT? button to specify whether or not to also store the keyboard
split point (YES/NO).
4. Press the WRITE button.
Computer Connection
These settings are used to select the mode related to MIDI signal flow when a personal computer is connected to the USB terminal of this instrument.
• When connecting to a personal computer, install the USB driver on the included CD-ROM to the computer first. (Refer to the separate manual for more information.)
1. Turn off the power to this instrument.
2. Connect a personal computer to the USB terminal on the rear of this instrument.
3. Turn on the power to this instrument.
4. On the MIDI MENU display, select COMPUTER CONNECTION.
• The display looks similar to the following.
NORMAL:
Ordinary mode
PC as master:
The mode which is appropriate for data transmission
KN as master:
The mode when this instrument is used as the
master keyboard.
KN as slave:
The mode when this instrument is used as a
slave instrument.
5. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a mode.
INTERFACE:
The mode when this instrument is used as a
connecting device between a PC with only
USB terminals and an instrument with only
MIDI terminals.
185
QQTG0692
19_Initialize.fm 186 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時56分
Initialize
This Keyboard has many settable functions and storable memories. However, you can return the settings
and memory to the factory-preset status.
INITIAL
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
on.
PROGRAM
MENUS
5. Press the OK button.
• The display changes to the confirmation display. Press the YES button if you wish to execute the initialization. Press the NO button if
you wish to cancel the procedure.
• The display changes to the following.
2. Select CONTROL.
• Initialization begins. When initialization is completed, “COMPLETED!” is shown on the display and the Keyboard returns to the normal
perform-ance mode.
• The USER MIDI and FAVORITES are not initialized by this procedure.
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Select INITIAL.
• This display changes to the following.
4. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the desired
type of initialization.
• PERFORMANCE includes all the items which
are listed below it.
186
QQTG0692
You can also reset all the PERFORMANCE
items with the following procedure:
Turn off the power to this instrument once.
Then, while pressing the three lower left buttons in the RHYTHM GROUP section (JAZZ
& SWING, BALLROOM & SHOW and LATIN
& WORLD) at the same time, turn the power
on again.
19_Initialize.fm 187 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時56分
About the performance data
PERFORMANCE
BACKUP
CURRENT PANEL settings
PANEL MEMORY
SEQUENCER
COMPOSER (MEMORY contents)
PERFORMANCE PADS (USER memories)
SOUND MEMORY
EFFECT MEMORY
MIDI (USER for the MIDI PRESETS) & FAVORITES
• The BACK UP data will not be erased even with the passage of time.
• The backup memory does not function for the stored contents until the power has been on for about 10
minutes.
• If you wish to retain the settings and stored memory contents for recall at a later time, store the desired
data on a disk/SD card.
• Data from previous Technics models may be limited to PERFORMANCE data.
Separately sold options
SZ-E2
Expression Pedal
SZ-P1
Foot Switch
PLUG-IN feature
This model is compatible with third-party extension plug-in software for the
KN2400/KN2600. See plug-in documentation for information about software
features and operation.
187
QQTG0692
19_Initialize.fm 188 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時56分
Terminals
Back panel terminals
MAX
OUT
IN
EXP PEDAL FOOT SW
MIN
MIC
VOLUME
R /MONO L
MIC
LINE OUT
PHONES
MIDI
USB
This terminal allows connection to a personal
computer with a USB cable (commercially available type AB cable).
Used with the applications on the included CDROM, you can record this instrument’s audio
sound or manage the instrument data with your
PC.
• Applications
Audio Recorder:
Application for Recording this instrument’s
sounds and for saving recorded digital audio
files in WAV, WMA (Windows Audio Format)
and MP3 formats.
Song Manager:
Application for managing this instrument’s
data on your PC by means of a USB cable.
MIDI
These terminals are for connection to another
MIDI instrument. (Refer to page 177.)
EXP PEDAL
The optional SZ-E2 Expression Pedal (sold separately) can be connected to this terminal to control the volume.
FOOT SW
An optional SZ-P1 Foot Switch (sold separately)
can be connected to each terminal to control various functions. (Refer to page 172.)
MIC
A microphone can be connected to this terminal.
(Refer to page 44.)
• Adjust the volume using MIC VOLUME.
LINE OUT
The total sound of this instrument can be output
from this terminal.
• For monaural output, connect the plug only in
the R/MONO terminal.
PHONES
Headphones can be connected to this instrument.
• When headphones are plugged into this jack,
the speakers of this instrument are disabled.
188
QQTG0692
19_Initialize.fm 189 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時56分
Symptoms which appear to be signs of
trouble
The following changes in performance may occur in the Technics Keyboard but do not indicate trouble.
Phenomenon
Sounds and effects
The buttons, keys, etc. malfunction.
Remedy
• Turn off the POWER button once, then turn it on again.
If this procedure is not successful, turn off the POWER
button once. Then, while pressing the three lower left
buttons in the RHYTHM GROUP section (JAZZ &
SWING, BALLROOM & SHOW and LATIN &
WORLD) at the same time, turn the POWER button on
again. (Note that, in this case, all programmable settings, functions and memories return to their factorypreset status.)
No sound is produced when the keys are • The MAIN VOLUME is at the minimum setting. Adjust
pressed.
the volume with the MAIN VOLUME control.
• The volumes for the selected parts are set to the minimum levels. Use the balance buttons to set the volumes of the relevant parts to appropriate levels. (Refer
to page 29.)
• The part is muted. (Refer to page 30.)
• The LOCAL CONTROL for a part performed on the
keyboard is set to OFF. Set the LOCAL CONTROL to
ON. (Refer to page 180.)
Only percussive instrument sounds are produced • In the SOUND GROUP section, the DRUM KITS butwhen the keyboard is played.
ton is on.
The volume is very low when the keyboard is • The volume setting in the SEQUENCER contents is
played.
very low. Follow the INITIAL procedure to reset the
settings. (Refer to page 186.)
The sound you hear is different from the sound • This sometimes occurs when you play back
you selected.
SEQUENCER or COMPOSER data which was created on a different model, or when MIDI data is
received from a connected instrument. Select the
desired sounds again.
AUTO PLAY
CHORD
Rhythm
The rhythm does not start.
No sound is produced for the automatic accom- • An ACCOMP part does not sound if its corresponding
paniment, or only the sounds of some parts are volume is set to the minimum level. Use the respective
produced.
balance buttons to set the ACCOMP 1–5 volumes to
appropriate levels.
Storage is not possible.
SEQUENCER
• The DRUMS volume is set to the minimum level. Use
the balance buttons to set the DRUMS volume to an
appropriate level.
• A SEQUENCER PLAY button is on. When you are not
playing back the SEQUENCER performance, turn off
the SEQUENCER PLAY button.
• CLOCK is set to MIDI. Set CLOCK to INTERNAL.
(Refer to page 181.)
• The remaining memory capacity of the SEQUENCER
is 0. Follow the SONG CLEAR or TRACK CLEAR procedure to erase the memory. (Refer to page 93.)
The playback measure indication is different from • The number of measures corresponds to the time sigwhen the performance was recorded.
nature of the rhythm selected at the start of recording.
To change the rhythm in the middle of the song, record
the rhythm change in the RHYTHM part. (Refer to
page 90.)
189
QQTG0692
19_Initialize.fm 190 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時56分
Disk/SD card
COMPOSER
Phenomenon
Remedy
Storage is not possible.
• The remaining memory capacity of the COMPOSER is
0.
Setting the time signature is not possible.
• The time signature cannot be changed for a pattern
which is currently recorded in the COMPOSER. If you
wish to change the time signature, first follow the procedure to clear the memory. (Refer to page 107.)
The playback timing of the rhythm pattern is dif- • The QUANTIZE function was on when the pattern was
ferent from the timing with which it was recorded. recorded and the timing was automatically corrected.
Set the quantize level to a smaller note unit or to OFF
when recording. (Refer to page 108.)
The Disk Drive produces a noise during recording • This occurs when the Disk Drive is reading a disk. It
or playback.
does not indicate a problem.
When the procedure to load from a disk/SD card • When performing the load operation from a disk/SD
is per-formed, the contents of the keyboard mem- card, the keyboard memory changes to that of the data
ory are erased.
loaded from the disk. If you wish to preserve a song
which is stored in the keyboard memory, save it on a
disk/SD card before performing the load procedure.
Data cannot be exchanged through MIDI termi- • Match the channels on the transmitting side and the
nals.
receiving side. (Refer to page 180.)
• When the USB terminal or both the MIDI IN and OUT
terminals are connected to a computer, depending on
the computer software the received data may be sent
back to the instrument just as it is. Because of this the
sound generated from the keys and the sound generated from the returned data are both produced, causing undesirable effects, such as the sounds canceling
each other out, for example. In this case, either change
the software settings to prevent received data from
being returned, or set the MIDI LOCAL CONTROL to
off.
Noise from a radio or TV can be heard.
• This sometimes occurs when electrical equipment
such as a radio or TV is used near the instrument. Try
moving such electrical equipment further away from
the instrument.
• The sound may be coming from a nearby broadcast
station or amateur radio station. If the sound is bothersome, consult your dealer or service center.
The cabinet becomes warm during use.
• This instrument has a built-in power source that heats
the cabinet to some degree. This is not an indication of
trouble.
Other
MIDI
The sound quavers or is distorted.
190
QQTG0692
19_Initialize.fm 191 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時56分
Error messages
No.
00
01
02
03
05
06
07
08
10
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Contents
The data on the disk that you are
using is for a different product.
An error has occurred while the disk
was loading.
Please try again!
There is no disk in the Disk Drive.
The file that you tried to load is empty.
An error has occurred while the disk
was saving.
Please try again!
The disk that you are using is write
protected.
Please remove the write protection
and try again.
The disk that you are using is full.
Please use another disk.
An error has occurred while the disk
was formatting. The disk that you are
using may be faulty.
Please try formatting another disk.
The data is already copy protected.
The song you are trying to save is
empty.
This STANDARD MIDI FILE is incompatible with this instrument and cannot
be loaded.
This is not a STANDARD MIDI FILE.
The timebase (PPQ resolution) that
you
tried
to
load
is
not
24/48/96/192/288/384 PPQ.
A problem has occurred with your
SEQUENCER Data.
This might be due to a damaged or
faulty disk.
Memory full
It is necessary to press REC STOP to
complete this procedure.
It is impossible to change the time signature because it has already been
set in the existing tracks.
A rhythm track already exists. It is
impossible to assign two tracks to
rhythm.
It is only possible to change the velocity on a melody track.
It is only possible to merge melody
tracks.
Tracks such as rhythm, chord and
control cannot be merged.
No.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
43
44
46
47
54
55
Contents
It is only possible to copy melody
tracks.
Tracks such as rhythm, chord and
control cannot be copied.
This song is too long to be saved as a
MIDI file.
The MIDI file that you have tried to
load exceeds the memory capacity of
this instrument and cannot be played.
The SEQUENCER memory has been
cleared.
It is not possible to change the time
signature of a COMPOSER pattern
after it has been recorded.
If you want to proceed, you must first
clear the entire COMPOSER pattern.
The time signature of the pattern from
which you are copying is different from
the COMPOSER memory that you are
using.
Either: Change the time signature of
the COMPOSER memory
or:
Copy from a pattern that has
the same time signature
Memory full
Select a Track before setting parameters for AUTO PUNCH RECORD.
The file that you are trying to load was
saved on a previous KN keyboard. It is
only possible to load using the “PERFORMANCE” option.
It is impossible to edit a Drum Kit.
Please select a different sound from
any group except Keyboard Percussion.
It is only possible to insert MELODY
Tracks. Tracks such as RHYTHM,
CHORD and CONTROL cannot be
inserted.
This procedure is not possible with a
composer pattern or the metronome.
Please select a preset rhythm pattern.
It is not possible to record using preset
banks, compile banks, or control
banks. Please select one of the user
banks.
Special tracks such as CHORD
(APC), RHY and CTL exist in the song
from which you are copying and are
incompatible with the destination song
because it is in the GM mode.
191
QQTG0692
19_Initialize.fm 192 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時56分
No.
56
58
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
192
QQTG0692
Contents
AUTO PUNCH recording has been
unsuccessful because SEQUENCER
operation was interrupted before the
PUNCH OUT measure was reached.
The song that you have tried to load
exceeds this instrument’s available
memory and cannot be loaded. The
selected song memory has been
cleared.
The computer connection is not active
because the computer port switch is
set to MIDI. Please turn the power off,
set the switch to the desired setting
and turn the power back on.
This Bitmap is in the wrong format for
the KN and cannot be loaded. See the
Owners Manual for more details.
Please select the Panel Memory that
you want to name.
It is not possible to use the CHORD
FINDER in this mode. Please select
CHORD FINDER from HOME page or
CHORD STEP RECORD page.
SOLO pads are special pads which
include Chord information. Pleases
use SOLO pads when the rhythm and
accompaniment is playing.
There are no APC or CHORD tracks.
Select and APC track or CHORD
track, and try again.
It is not possible to record directly into
the SOLO pads. Record on the
SEQUENCER and Copy the melody
and chord information into a SOLO
pad.
It is not possible to delete all measures.
It is not possible to insert over 16 measures in a PATTERN.
It is not possible to set the start measure to the measures you set to copy.
20_Index.fm 193 ページ
2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後2時7分
Index
A
F
ADVANCED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
AMPLITUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
APC CONTROL (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
AUTO PLAY CHORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
AUTO PLAY CHORD INPUT (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
AUTO PLAY CHORD OUTPUT (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . 184
AUTO SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
FADE IN/OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
FAVORITES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
FILL IN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
FINGERED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
FOOT CONTROLLERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
FOOT SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Foot Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
B
BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Backup memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
BANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
BANK VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
BASIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
BEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
BEND RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
G
GENERAL MIDI LEVEL 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
GLIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
H
Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
C
CHORD FINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
CHORD STEP RECORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
CHORUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
CLOCK (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
COMMON SETTING (MIDI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
COMPOSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
COMPUTER CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
CONDUCTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
CONTRAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
CONTROL MESSAGES (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
COUNT INTRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
CUSTOMIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
D
DEMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
DIGITAL DRAWBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
DIGITAL EFFECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
DIRECT PLAY (KN2400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Disk Drive (KN2400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
DISK (KN2400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
DISPLAY TIME OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
DISPLAY HOLD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
DRUM EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
DRUM PATTERN OUTPUT (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
DRUMS TYPE (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
E
EASY COMPOSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
EASY EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
EASY REC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
EXP PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Expression Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
I
INITIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
INPUT/OUTPUT SETTING (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
INTRO & ENDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
K
KEY SCALING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
KEY SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
L
LANGUAGE SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
LEFT HOLD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
LFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
LINE OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
LOAD (DISK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
LOAD (SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
LOCAL (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
M
MAIN VOLUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
MASTER TUNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
MEASURE COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
MEASURE ERASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
MEASURE & TIME SIGNATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
MEMORY, AUTO PLAY CHORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
MEMORY, RHYTHM GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
MEMORY, SOUND GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
MIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
MIDI PRESETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
MIDI SETTING LOAD OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
MIXER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
MODULATION (KN2600) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
MULTI EFFECT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Music stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
MUSIC STYLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
193
QQTG0692
20_Index.fm 194 ページ
2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後2時7分
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
MUTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
N
NOTE EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
NOTE ONLY (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
O
ON BASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
ONE TOUCH PLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
OTHER PARTS/TR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
OVERALL TOUCH SENSITIVITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
P
PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
PANEL MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
PART SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
PART SETTING (SOUND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
PART SETTING (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
PATTERN COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
PERFORMANCE PADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
PIANIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
PITCH BEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
PROGRAM CHANGE MODE (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
PUNCH RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Q
QUANTIZE, COMPOSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
QUANTIZE, SEQUENCER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
R
REALTIME COMMANDS (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
REALTIME RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
REVERB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
RHYTHM GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
RIGHT 1 INPUT (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
S
SAVE (DISK) (KN2400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
SAVE (SD) (KN2600). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
SD CARD (KN2600) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
SEQUENCER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
SEQUENCER PLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
SEQUENCER RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
SEQUENCER SONG SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
SOLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
SONG CLEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
SONG SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
SOUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
SOUND ARRANGER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
SOUND EXPLORER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
SOUND EDIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
SOUND GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
194
QQTG0692
SPLIT POINT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Standard MIDI File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
START/STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
STEP RECORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
STEP RECORD: CHORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
STEP RECORD: RHYTHM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
STOP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
SUSTAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
SYNCHRO & BREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
T
TAP TEMPO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
TECHNI-CHORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
TEMPO/PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
TONE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
TONE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
TONE SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
TRACK ASSIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
TRACK CLEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
TRACK MERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
TRANSPOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
U
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
V
VARIATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
VELOCITY CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Volume balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
21_Specifications.fm 195 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後3時10分
Specifications
SX-KN2400
61 KEYS (WITH INITIAL TOUCH)
SOUND GENERATOR
PCM
MAX. POLYPHONY
64 NOTES
SX-KN2600
1064 SOUNDS (1030 SOUNDS +2
ORGAN DRAWBARS + 32 DRUM
KITS)
NUMBER OF SOUNDS
1024 SOUNDS (990 SOUNDS +2
ORGAN DRAWBARS + 32 DRUM
KITS)
SOUND GROUP
PIANO, GUITAR & HARPSI, STRINGS & VOCAL, BRASS,
MALLET & ORCH PERC, ORGAN & ACCORDION,
SAX & WOODWIND, SYNTH, BASS, DRUM KITS,
DIGITAL DRAWBAR
SOUND EXPLORER
嘷
EFFECT
SUSTAIN, DIGITAL EFFECT, MULTI EFFECT, REVERB, CHORUS
WHEEL
PITCH BEND
PART SELECT
RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT
TRANSPOSE
±12 NOTES
RHYTHMS
SOUNDS
KEYBOARD
NUMBER OF RHYTHMS
170 RHYTHMS × 4 VARIATIONS
RHYTHM GROUP
POP, ROCK, BALLAD, JAZZ & SWING, DANCE POP, SIMPLE BEAT,
DANCE CLUB, TRAD & WALTZ, BALLROOM & SHOW, LATIN & WORLD,
USA
PITCH BEND, MODULATION
FAVORITES
嘷
CONTROLS
MAIN VOLUME, MIC VOLUME, BALANCE, MUTE, CONDUCTOR,
START/STOP, INTRO & ENDING 1, INTRO & ENDING 2, FILL IN 1,
FILL IN 2, COUNT INTRO, SYNCHRO&BREAK, TEMPO/PROGRAM,
TAP TEMPO, FADE IN/OUT, SPLIT POINT
PERFORMANCE PADS
20 PRESET BANKS × 6 PADS WITH SOLO, USER BANK × 3,
COMPILE BANKS × 2, CONTROL PRESET × 1, STOP, AUTO SETTING
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MODE: BASIC, ADVANCED 1, 2, PIANIST
MEMORY, ON BASS, CHORD FINDER, LEFT HOLD
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
嘷
SOUND ARRANGER
嘷
MUSIC STYLIST
嘷
ONE TOUCH PLAY
嘷
TECHNI-CHORD
嘷
PANEL MEMORY
3 BANKS × 8, SET, NEXT BANK, BANK VIEW
SEQUENCER
16 TRACKS
RESOLUTION: 1/96 PER BEAT
STORAGE CAPACITY: APPROX.40000 NOTES (10 SONG MAX.)
INPUT MODES: EASY RECORD, REALTIME RECORD, STEP RECORD
FUNCTIONS: RECORD & EDIT, COPY & PASTE, RANGE EDIT
COMPOSER
8 PARTS: BASS, ACCOMP 1 – 5, DRUMS 1, 2
STORAGE CAPACITY: APPROX. 13000 NOTES
INPUT MODES: EASY COMPOSER, REALTIME RECORD, STEP
RECORD
FUNCTIONS: PATTERN COPY, SEQ TO COMPOSER COPY,
LOAD SINGLE COMPOSER
MEMORY: 3 BANKS
DISK
3.5 inch DISK DRIVE for 2HD
(1.44MB), 2DD (720KB)
LOAD, SAVE, DIRECT PLAY,
SONG MEDLEY, DISK TOOLS,
PREFERENCES
—
195
QQTG0692
21_Specifications.fm 196 ページ 2003年3月6日 木曜日 午後1時38分
SX-KN2400
SD CARD
—
SX-KN2600
LOAD, SAVE,
FAVORITE SONGS,
SD SONG MEDLEY,
SD-AUDIO PLAY, SD-SOUND
PLAY, SD TOOLS,
SD PREFERENCES
SOUND
PART SETTING, MIXER, MASTER TUNING, KEY SCALING,
TECHNI-CHORD, SOUND LOAD OPTION, APC REVERB SETTING,
SOUND ARRANGER
SOUND EDIT
EASY EDIT, TONE, PITCH, FILTER, AMPLITUDE, LFO, EFFECT,
CONTROLLER
MEMORY: 40, 1 USER DRUM KIT
REVERB & EFFECT
MIC REVERB & EFFECT, SOUND LOAD OPTION, MIXER, MULTI,
CHORUS, REVERB, TONE CONTROL
CONTROL
INITIAL, OVERALL TOUCH SENSITIVITY, FOOT CONTROLLERS
PANEL MEMORY MODE,
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER MODE, FADE IN/OUT SETTING
CUSTOMIZE
FAVORITE SETTING, DISPLAY TIME OUT,
MIDI SETTING LOAD OPTION, DATA PROTECTION,
LANGUAGE SETTING,
DISK PREFERENCES (KN2400)/SD PREFERENCES (KN2600)
MIDI
PART SETTING, CONTROL MESSAGES, REALTIME MESSAGES,
COMMON SETTING, INPUT/OUTPUT SETTING, MIDI PRESETS,
MODE SETTING, COMPUTER CONNECTION
DISPLAY
LCD
PAGE, CONTRAST, EXIT, DISPLAY HOLD
HELP
嘷
DEMO
嘷
TERMINALS
PHONES, FOOT SW, EXP PEDAL, LINE OUT (R/MONO, L),
MIDI (IN, OUT), USB, MIC
OUTPUT
36 W (18 W × 2)
SPEAKERS
12 cm × 2, 6.5 cm × 2
POWER REQUIREMENT
75 W
AC120/220/230–240V 50/60 Hz
AC120V 60 Hz (NORTH AMERICA AND MEXICO)
AC220–240V 50/60 Hz (EUROPE, AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND)
DIMENSIONS (W × H × D)
105.7 cm × 16.2 cm × 40.4 cm (41-5/8" × 6-3/8" × 15-29/32")
NET WEIGHT
11.7 kg (25.8 lbs)
11.4 kg (25.1 lbs)
AC CORD, MUSIC STAND,
CD-ROM (AUDIO RECORDER,
SONG MANAGER, USB DRIVER)
AC CORD, MUSIC STAND,
CD-ROM (AUDIO RECORDER,
SONG MANAGER, USB DRIVER),
SD CARD
ACCESSORIES
• Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
• The SD logo is a trademark.
196
QQTG0692
40 W (20 W × 2)
21_Specifications.fm 197 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後6時33分
(For U.S.A.)
PANASONIC SALES COMPANY, DIVISION OF MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC
OF PUERTO RICO, INC.,
Ave. 65 de Infanteria, Km. 9.5
San Gabriel Industrial Park, Carolina, Puerto Rico 00985
PANASONIC CONSUMER ELECTRONICS COMPANY,
DIVISION OF MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC CORPORATION OF AMERICA
One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, New Jersey 07094
/
Musical Instrument
Products Limited Warranty
Limited Warranty Coverage
If your product does not work properly because of a defect in materials or workmanship, Panasonic
Consumer Electronics Company or Panasonic Sales Company (collectively referred to as “the
warrantor”) will, for the length of the period indicated on the chart below, which starts with the date of
original purchase (“warranty period”), at its option either (a) repair your product with new or refurbished
parts, or (b) replace it with a new or a refurbished product. The decision to repair or replace will be
made by the warrantor.
Product
Organs, Digital Pianos,
Digital Ensemble Series, Tone Cabinets,
Panasonic Digital Pianos
Keyboards
Panasonic Keyboards, Synthesizers,
Sound Modules, Expansion Boards,
Disk Drives, Drum Percussion Units,
MIDI Orchestra, Keyboard Amplifiers,
Foot Pedals, Foot Controllers,
Personal Music PA Systems
USB Reader/Writer, Personal Computer
Card Adapters (in exchange for defective
item)
SD Memory Cards (in exchange for
defective item)
Parts
Labor
Service
Three (3) Years
One (1) Year
In-Home or Carry-In
One (1) Year
One (1) Year
In-Home or Carry-In
One (1) Year
One (1) Year
Carry-In or Mail-In
One (1) Year
Not Applicable
Carry-In or Mail-In
Ninety (90) Days
Not Applicable
Carry-In or Mail-In
In-Home service, if applicable, requires clear, complete and easy access to the product by the
authorized servicer and does not include removal or re-installation of an installed product. It is possible
that certain in-home repairs will not be completed in-home, but will require that the product, or parts of
the product, be removed for shop diagnosis and/or repair and then returned.
Limited Warranty Limits And Exclusions
This warranty ONLY COVERS failures due to defects in materials or workmanship, and DOES NOT
COVER normal wear and tear or cosmetic damage. The warranty ALSO DOES NOT COVER damages
which occurred in shipment, or failures which are caused by products not supplied by the warrantor, or
failures which result from accidents, misuse, abuse, neglect, mishandling, misapplication, alteration,
faulty installation, set-up adjustments, misadjustment of consumer controls, improper maintenance,
power line surge, lightning damage, modification, rental use of the product, service by anyone other
than a Factory Servicenter or other Authorized Servicer, or damage that is attributable to acts of God.
THERE ARE NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES EXCEPT AS LISTED UNDER “LIMITED WARRANTY
COVERAGE”. THE WARRANTOR IS NOT LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT, OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH
OF THIS WARRANTY, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOSS OF GOODWILL, PROFITS OR
REVENUE, LOSS OF USE OF THIS PRODUCT OR ANY ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT, COST OF
SUBSTITUTE EQUIPMENT, DOWNTIME COSTS, OR CLAIMS OF ANY PARTY DEALING WITH
BUYER FOR SUCH DAMAGES. (As examples, this excludes damages for lost time, cost of having
someone remove or re-install an installed unit if applicable, travel to and from the servicer, loss of
media, data or other memory content. The items listed are not exclusive, but are for illustration only.)
ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY, ARE LIMITED TO THE PERIOD OF THE LIMITED WARRANTY.
During the “Labor” warranty period there will be no charge for labor. During the “Parts” warranty period,
there will be no charge for parts. You must carry-in or mail-in your product or arrange for in-home
service, as applicable, during the warranty period. If non-rechargeable batteries are included, they are
not warranted. This warranty only applies to products purchased and serviced in the United States or
Puerto Rico. This warranty is extended only to the original purchaser of a new product which was not
sold “as is”. A purchase receipt or other proof of the original purchase date is required for warranty
service.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or
limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the exclusions may not apply to you.
Carry-In, Mail-In or In-Home Service
For Carry-In, Mail-In or In-Home Service (as applicable) in the United States call 1-800-211PANA(7262) or visit the website (http://www.panasonic.com).
For assistance in Puerto Rico call Panasonic Sales Company (787)-750-4300 or fax (787)-768-2910.
PARTS AND SERVICE (INCLUDING COST OF AN IN-HOME SERVICE CALL IF APPLICABLE)
WHICH ARE NOT COVERED BY THIS LIMITED WARRANTY ARE YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have others rights which vary from state
to state. If a problem with this product develops during or after the warranty period, you may contact
your dealer or Servicenter. If the problem is not handled to your satisfaction, then write to the
warrantor's Consumer Affairs Department at the addresses listed for the warrantor.
Customer Services Directory
197
QQTG0692
21_Specifications.fm 198 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後3時10分
MEMO
198
QQTG0692
21_Specifications.fm 199 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後3時10分
MEMO
199
QQTG0692
10_Part V.fm 105 ページ 2003年3月9日 日曜日 午後3時4分
Part V
Composer
COMPOSER menu
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
on.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Select COMPOSER.
• The display looks similar to the following.
Summary of the COMPOSER menu items
RECORDING MEMORY-A
Create a memory in the MEMORY A bank.
PATTERN COPY (page 115)
Copy a rhythm pattern into a memory.
RECORDING MEMORY-B
Create a memory in the MEMORY B bank.
SEQ TO COMPOSER COPY (page 116)
Copy recorded data in the SEQUENCER to
the COMPOSER.
RECORDING MEMORY-C
Create a memory in the MEMORY C bank.
EASY COMPOSER (page 106)
Create a rhythm pattern with a simplified
procedure.
LOAD SINGLE COMPOSER
Recall the desired COMPOSER data from
data saved on a disk/card. This procedure
is the same as when COMPOSER is
selected for SINGLE LOAD. (Refer to
pages 121, 134.)
Three ways to record in the COMPOSER
There are three ways to create and record a
rhythm.
䡲 Simple recording method (page 106)
Use EASY COMPOSER to quickly create a
unique rhythm just by selecting a pattern for
each part.
䡲 Pattern Copy (page 115)
Copy a preset rhythm or SEQUENCER data to a
COMPOSER memory, edit it as you like, and
then store it as a new rhythm.
䡲 Create a completely new rhythm (page 106)
Composer
Compose all the parts of a completely new
rhythm from scratch.
• You can use either realtime recording or step
record for any part of the recording.
105
QQTG0692
10_Part V.fm 106 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分
Part V
Composer
Simple recording method
With EASY COMPOSER you can easily create a unique rhythm pattern by selecting a different style for
each part of the rhythm.
1. On the COMPOSER MENU display, select
5. Use the VARI ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
EASY COMPOSER.
• The display looks similar to the following.
variation number.
• The number of variations differs depending on
the selected style.
• A part which is set to OFF does not sound.
Note that the “BsDrum&Snare” part cannot be
set to OFF.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 to select styles for the
other parts.
2. Use the MEM ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
memory in which to record your rhythm.
• Select from A-vari 1 to 4, B-vari 1 to 4 and
C-vari 1 to 4.
3. Use the PART ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the
part.
• In the EASY COMPOSER, the new rhythm
pattern is divided into 9 parts, to each of which
a style and variation is assigned.
7. Press the SET button.
• The rhythm pattern is played back.
• If you are not satisfied with the rhythm pattern,
repeat steps 3 to 7.
• If you wish to correct the sounds or phrases in
your rhythm pattern, press the EDIT button.
The display changes to the recording display.
(Refer to page 108.)
• For playback, refer to page 111.
4. Use the STYLE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a
style.
Create a completely new rhythm
Clear the memories and compose a completely new rhythm from scratch.
• You can also use this method when copying a pattern from a preset rhythm or the SEQUENCER.
Prepare to record
2. Use the buttons below the display to select the
memory in which to record (RECORDING
MEMORY A, B, or C).
• The display looks similar to the following.
pattern you want to create.
• If the MEM CLR button is pressed, all the current contents of the MEMORY (A/B/C) are
erased (a confirmation display appears).
• You can press the NAMING button and assign
a name to the MEMORY.
Composer
1. On the COMPOSER MENU display, select a
106
QQTG0692
10_Part V.fm 107 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分
Part V
Composer
5. Press the YES button.
• All the data for the selected pattern is
erased.
6. Press the MEASURE SETTING button.
• To assign a name to each VARIATION, press
the VARI button and select a number.
3. On the RECORD MEMORY display, press the
OK button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
7. Use the MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the number of measures in your new
rhythm pattern (1 to 16).
8. Use the TIME SIGNATURE ∧ and ∨ buttons
4. Press the CLEAR THE ENTIRE PATTERN
button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
to specify the meter of the pattern (1/4 to
8/4).
• When the settings for the MEASURE and
TIME SIGNATURE of the INTRO or ENDING
patterns are changed, the Maj and Min settings change at the same time.
9. Press the OK button.
10. Press the EXIT button.
KEY SETTING
Set the key and chord in which you wish the
recorded pattern to be played. If the recorded
performance is played in a key or chord different
from this setting, the automatic accompaniment
will not be able to distinguish the correct chord.
1. On the RECORDING display press the KEY
2. Use the KEY ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the key.
Use the CHORD ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the
chord type (Maj/Min).
3. When you have finished making the settings,
press the EXIT button.
Composer
SETTING button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
107
QQTG0692
10_Part V.fm 108 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分
Part V
Recording procedure
Composer
• Record the performance in C major for correct
chord progressions during playback. Follow
the KEY SETTING procedure if you wish to
record the performance in a different scale.
• PITCH BEND, MODULATION (KN2600)
(except for the DRUMS part) effects are also
recorded.
• The SUSTAIN ON/OFF is also stored (except
for the DRUMS part).
1. In the START RECORDING area on the display, select the rhythm part you want to record
first.
BAS: BASS
AC1–5: ACCOMP 1–5
DR1, 2: DRUMS 1, 2
• The metronome sound starts and the display
looks similar to the following.
䡲 Button functions
PART BALANCE:
Adjust the volume of each part on the PART
BALANCE display. (These settings are not
recorded.)
PART SETTING:
You can make detailed settings for each part.
(Refer to page 110.)
STEP RECORD:
Change to the STEP RECORD mode. (Refer
to page 111.)
2. Adjust the tempo.
• The tempo is shown on the display as q =.
• The tempo can be freely adjusted when you
play back the rhythm pattern, so record at the
tempo which is easiest for you to play.
3. Select the sound.
• For the DRUMS part, only sounds from the
DRUM KITS sound group can be selected.
• For the ACCOMP and BASS parts, select
sounds from groups other than the DIGITAL
DRAWBAR sound groups.
• The sounds marked with # represent special
guitar performances and changing them to
other sounds may result in an unnatural, awkward sound expression.
Composer
4. Record the part.
• The specified number of measures are repeatedly played back, during which time any newly
played notes are added to those already
recorded. The current measure number is
shown on the display as “MEASURE=”.
108
QQTG0692
SOLO:
Mute all parts except the part which is currently being recorded.
• A MUTE mark is shown for the other parts on
the display.
• To turn off the SOLO function, press this button again.
PART CLR:
Erase all recorded contents of the currently
selected part.
NOTE CLR:
Data is erased one note or one percussion
instrument (DRUMS part) sound at a time.
• Hold and press this button, and press the keyboard key that corresponds to the note or percussion instrument (DRUMS part) sound you
wish to erase.
ALL ERAS:
The performance recorded in the selected part
is erased for as long as this button is pressed.
QUANTIZE:
Smooth out any unevenness in the timing of
your performance.
• Before recording, select the note value for the
desired quantize level. (The quantize level is
shown on the display as QUANTIZE=.)
10_Part V.fm 109 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分
Part V
Composer
KEY IN CHORD MODIFY <PAGE 2/2> (except
for INTRO, ENDING, DRUMS):
Use the GROUP and TYPE ∧ and ∨ buttons
to select the type of pattern progression.
• This setting is for the sound that is going to be
recorded from this time.
5. Use the buttons below the display to switch to
a different recording part, and proceed to
record each part in turn.
6. When you have finished recording the rhythm,
turn off the PROGRAM MENUS button.
Chord Modify Change
For data that has already been recorded, you can select the type of pattern progression for the bass and
accomp parts.
• This function cannot be used for the INTRO and ENDING patterns.
1. On the RECORDING display, press the
CHORD MODIFY CHANGE button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the PART ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the
part you wish to set.
3. Use the GROUP and MODIFY TYPE ∧ and ∨
buttons to select the corresponding progression type.
• If a progression type for which the note name
is displayed (in C key) was selected for the
chord group, played notes which are not displayed are changed to notes which are displayed.
4. Use the FUNCTION ∧ and ∨ buttons to
enable or disable the function.
KEEP:
No change.
CHANGE: The change is enabled.
Composer
5. When you have finished making the settings
for each part, press the OK button.
6. Press the EXIT button.
109
QQTG0692
10_Part V.fm 110 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分
Part V
Composer
Part Setting
You can make detailed settings for each part.
1. On the REALTIME RECORDING display,
press the PART SETTING button.
• The settings comprise 3 pages of the display.
Use the PAGE buttons to switch pages.
2. Use the PART ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a
part.
3. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the corresponding item.
<PAGE 1>
PAN:
Adjust the stereo balance of each part (LEFT
64 – CENTER – RIGHT 63).
• At “LEFT 64”, the sound is all the way to the
left, at “RIGHT 63” all the way to the right. The
center point is CENTER.
REV:
Depth of the REVERB (0 to 127).
CHO:
Depth of the CHORUS (0 to 127).
BEND RANGE:
Adjust the range of pitch change when the
PITCH BEND wheel is operated (0 to 12).
<PAGE 3>
PITCH POINT:
The pitch at which the pattern progression
sound is lowered by one octave.
• When the root note of the specified chord is
higher than the set pitch point, the pitch of that
part is automatically lowered by one octave,
thus avoiding an unnaturally high accompaniment pitch.
• This is effective only for the part for which the
Melody group was selected in CHORD MODIFY CHANGE.
SOUND:
Use the panel buttons to select the sound.
DIGI EFF:
Set the DIGITAL EFFECT to on or off.
• (SOUND) is the initialized setting of the sound.
Composer
<PAGE 2>
BALANCE:
Adjust the volume balance.
110
QQTG0692
EQ-Hi:
Sound correction in the high range.
• Use the FC ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the standard frequency. Use the GAIN ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the ratio of change.
EQ-Low:
Sound correction in the low range.
• Use the FC ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the standard frequency. Use the GAIN ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the ratio of change.
10_Part V.fm 111 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分
Part V
Composer
Playback
1. In the RHYTHM GROUP section, press the
• The display looks similar to the following.
MEMORY button.
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
SIMPLE
BEAT
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
DANCE
CLUB
USA
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
TRAD &
WALTZ
MEMORY
LOAD
2. Select the desired memory (A/B/C).
3. Use the VARIATION buttons to select a variation.
4. Press the START/STOP button.
• The DRUMS part begins to play back.
• The BASS and ACCOMP parts are played
back when you use the AUTO PLAY CHORD.
Step Record
Use STEP RECORD to store the notes one-by-one on the display. This is a convenient way to store complicated patterns that are difficult to play.
Recording procedure
1. While you are recording, press the STEP
RECORD button.
• The display changes to the STEP RECORD
display similar to the following.
3. Use the PAGE button to access the PAGE 2/2
display.
4. Use the left LENGTH buttons to specify the
to the note position you are going to store.
• Each dot represents one-eighth of a quarternote (a thirty-second note).
• When storing triplets, it may not be possible to
match the timing exactly with the 1/32-note
steps. However, if you select triplet-type notes
for the note length (LENGTH) in step 4 below,
the timing is automatically corrected.
note value. Select from r3, r, x3, x, e3, e, q3, q,
h, w, w × 2 to 4. (A 3 denotes a triplet-type
note.)
• For note values other than these, use the right
LENGTH buttons to specify the note value to
be added to that which you specified with the
left buttons.
Example: To record a dotted quarter-note (q.)
q+e
(Continued on the next page)
111
QQTG0692
Composer
2. Use the CURSOR buttons to move the cursor
10_Part V.fm 112 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分
Part V
5. Use the PHRS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to continue storing
actual length of the produced sound for the
desired legato or staccato effect.
notes.
• To record a different part, use the PART ∧ and
∨ buttons to select another part.
• The NOTE, VELOCITY, LENGTH, CHORD
MODIFY and CONTROL can be revised later.
Press the OK button after the revision.
TENU (tenuto):
Sound is produced for 95%
of the note length.
NORM (normal): 80%
STAC (staccato): 50%
CUTT (cutting): 25%
6. Specify the pitch and velocity of the note by
playing the keyboard.
• The dot on the display where the note is
stored changes to a ∗ mark.
• When recording chords, you can store multiple
notes at one position.
REST: To store a rest, after specifying the note
LENGTH, press the REST button.
• Positions at which nothing is stored are read
as rests.
ERS: If you make a mistake, move the cursor to
the error, and after displaying the data
you wish to erase, press the ERS button.
Measure Edit
You can edit the recorded data one measure at a time.
Select the function you wish to edit.
1. During recording, press the MEASURE EDIT
button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Select the function.
3. Follow the procedure to edit the function (see
below).
Composer
Composer
• Only the contents of the same pattern can be
edited.
112
QQTG0692
• You can easily switch between the REALTIME
mode and the STEP mode any time during
recording. To return to the realtime recording
display during the STEP RECORD mode,
press the EXIT button.
10_Part V.fm 113 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分
Part V
Composer
MEASURE COPY
Copy recorded data of specified measures to a
specified point.
• On the destination track, the new data
replaces the current measure contents.
2. Specify where you wish to copy the selected
measures to.
• On the TO side, specify the settings with the
corresponding buttons.
PART:
Select the part to copy to.
START MEASURE:
Specify the start point to copy the selected
measures to.
1. Specify the measures you wish to copy from
3. Press the OK button.
the source track (FROM).
• On the FROM side, specify the settings with
the corresponding buttons.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the
YES button to execute the function, or press
the NO button to cancel the function.
• If the FROM and TO parts are the same and
the FROM and TO measures overlap, copy is
not possible.
PART:
Select the part to copy from. (If ALL is
selected, all parts are copied.)
FIRST MEASURE:
Specify the first measure to copy.
LAST MEASURE:
Specify the last measure to copy.
MEASURE ERASE
Erase the recorded contents of specific measures.
• Note that only the contents of the measures
are erased, not the measures themselves; the
length of the performance remains the same.
3. Use the LAST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the end point (measure number).
4. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the
YES button to execute the function, or press
the NO button to cancel the function.
1. Use the PART ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
Composer
part.
• If ALL is selected, data is erased from the
specified measures of all the parts at one time.
2. Use the FIRST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the start point (measure number).
113
QQTG0692
10_Part V.fm 114 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分
Part V
Composer
MEASURE DELETE
MEASURE INSERT
Delete specified measures from all parts at once.
• The length of the performance accordingly
decreases by the number of deleted measures.
Insert blank measures at a specified point.
• The length of the performance accordingly
increases by the number of inserted measures.
1. Use the FIRST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons, to
1. Use the FIRST MEASURE button to select the
specify the first measure to delete.
2. Use the LAST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the last measure to delete.
• One measure is the smallest unit that can be
deleted.
point (measure) where the measures are to be
inserted.
2. Use the NUMBER OF MEASURE button to
select the number of blank measures to insert.
• No more than 16 measures total can be
inserted.
3. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the
YES button to execute the function, or press
the NO button to cancel the function.
Composer
• When the INTRO or ENDING measures are
deleted, the Maj and Min data are erased at
the same time.
114
QQTG0692
3. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the
YES button to execute the function, or press
the NO button to cancel the function.
• The Maj or Min data is inserted in the INTRO
and ENDING at the same time.
10_Part V.fm 115 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分
Part V
Composer
Pattern Copy
Use this function to copy a pattern from a rhythm or from SEQUENCER data.
PATTERN COPY
Copy a rhythm to the COMPOSER.
• You can also copy a pattern from the
MEMORY.
䡲 Copying individual parts
1. Use the PAGE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
PAGE 2/2.
• The display looks similar to the following.
1. On the COMPOSER MENU display, select
PATTERN COPY.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. On the FROM side, use the buttons to specify
2. Select the pattern you wish to copy.
• In the FROM box, specify the settings with the
corresponding buttons.
the part to copy from.
• For the DRUM part you can specify the
DRUMS 1 or 2 part; for other parts you can
specify a part other than a DRUMS part.
3. Specify the destination on the TO side to
GROUP: Group name
RHYTHM: Rhythm name
PATTERN: Pattern name
• If ALL is selected, all the patterns are copied.
which the part will be copied.
4. Press the OK button.
3. Select the memory you wish to copy to.
• In the TO box, specify the settings with the
corresponding buttons.
MEMORY: Memory name (A, B or C)
PATTERN: Pattern name
• If ALL is selected, all the patterns are copied.
Press
the OK button.
4.
• When copying has been successfully completed, “COMPLETED!” appears on the display.
Composer
• If you wish to use the COMPOSER functions
to edit the copied data, press the EDIT button,
and follow the procedure to record a pattern.
115
QQTG0692
10_Part V.fm 116 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時45分
Part V
Composer
SEQ TO COMPOSER COPY
Data from the SEQUENCER can be copied to a
COMPOSER memory. For example, you can
use a rhythm pattern on a song disk as the automatic accompaniment for your own performance.
1. Play back the song you wish to copy from
9. For each COMPOSER part, specify the
SEQUENCER to confirm the tracks, the measures and the time signature you wish to copy.
SEQUENCER track from which to copy data.
• Use the PART ▲ and ▼ buttons to specify
the part name, and the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the track number.
• Parts which are set to OFF are blank.
2. Follow the procedure in “Prepare to record” to
prepare the COMPOSER memory you will be
copying to. (Refer to page 106.)
• Be sure that time signature setting in the
SEQUENCER data you are copying from and
the time signature in the COMPOSER memory you are copying to are the same, or the
data will not be copied successfully.
3. On the COMPOSER MENU display, select
SEQ TO COMPOSER COPY.
• The display looks similar to the following.
4. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the number of the first measure to
copy.
5. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the number of the last measure to copy.
6. Use the TRANSPOSE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
change the key of the copied measures (−24
to +24).
• Units are in semitones.
7. Use the MEMORY ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify
the COMPOSER memory to copy to.
8. Use the PATTERN ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify
Composer
the pattern to copy to.
116
QQTG0692
10. Press the OK button.
• “COMPLETED!” is shown on the display.
• If you wish to use the COMPOSER function
to edit the copied data, press the EDIT button, and follow the procedure to record a pattern.
• In the case of INTRO or ENDING, if a measure contains a Maj or Min command, it is
reproduced in the other pattern as well.
Part VI Disk Drive (KN2400)
Outline of the Disk Drive function
The Disk Drive enables you to store recorded and stored data from this instrument’s memories on disks,
as well as play commercial recorded disks on this instrument.
Internal memory and Disk Drive
The storable internal memory of this instrument
as well as the backup time are limited. However,
the Disk Drive maximizes your control of data
management by allowing you to store (SAVE)
this instrument’s data on disks, and then to recall
(LOAD) it at any time.
• The BACK UP data will not be erased even
with the passage of time.
䡲 The following data can be saved/loaded:
Floppy Disk Drive
SAVE
LOAD
PERFORMANCE
CURRENT PANEL (The current panel settings)
PANEL MEMORY*
SEQUENCER
COMPOSER* (MEMORY contents)
SOUND MEMORY*
PERFORMANCE PADS (USER memories)
EFFECT MEMORY*
BACKUP
MIDI & FAVORITES
• When creating or saving song data, it is recommended that you use the performance data
in the PERFORMANCE group.
Floppy disk
• Instead of using MIDI & FAVORITES as frequently loaded and saved data, it is recommended that you save it with other data as
Keyboard backup data.
• A ∗ mark indicates that data can be loaded to
and from a specific memory (SINGLE LOAD).
• The SEQUENCER contents can be saved in
one-song increments (SEQUENCER SONG
SAVE).
• Please use 2HD disks to load/save BACKUP
data.
Main parts of the Disk Drive
Disk slot
Eject button
Press to remove the disk from the Disk Drive.
• You can use 3.5 inch 2DD (720 KB) or 2HD
(1.44 MB) disks; however, 2HD disks formatted as 2DD cannot be used.
Eject button
117
QQTG0692
Disk Drive (KN2400)
11_Part VI.fm 117 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分
Disk Drive (KN2400)
11_Part VI.fm 118 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分
Part VI
Disk Drive (KN2400)
Using commercial song disks
Playback of commercial song disks
Not only disks recorded on this instrument, but
also data from commercial song disks can be
read on this instrument.
• This instrument accepts the following file formats:
DIRECT PLAY lets you enjoy playing commercially sold song disks directly from a disk. It’s fast
because you don’t have to load the disk data into
your instrument’s memory.
TECHNICS File format
Standard MIDI File format
• DIRECT PLAY is possible from the following
disks:
Standard MIDI File
䡲 Loading Technics File format disks
Standard MIDI File with Lyrics
Using Technics file format disks allows you load
new SOUND EDIT, rhythm & accompaniments,
PANEL MEMORY, PERFORMANCE PADS and
Song data into your instrument to expand its
potential even further.
DISK ORCHESTRA
COLLECTION™ (DOC)
䡲 About Standard MIDI Files
“Standard MIDI File” (SMF) is a standardized
data format which makes it possible for music
data to be exchanged among different sequencers. Data stored in this format on sequencers of
different models can be played back on this
instrument, and vice versa. Note, however, that
Standard MIDI Files ensure the compatibility of
data such as NOTE data (keyboard performance
data), VELOCITY (how hard the keyboard is
played), PROGRAM NUMBER data (voice number data), etc. Because it does not guarantee
100% faithful reproduction of recorded music
which is replete with such data, it may be necessary for you to adjust the settings to your satisfaction.
• Only files with the “.MID” extension can be
loaded.
• Standard MIDI File FORMAT 1 can be loaded,
but not saved.
• This instrument’s SEQUENCER data can be
saved to a disk in Standard MIDI File (FORMAT 0) and can be used by other equipment.
PianoDisc™
* All product and company names are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective owners.
* DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION is a trademark of
the YAMAHA Corporation.
䡲 SMF with LYRICS
SMF with LYRICS is a format in which character
information that is included with the MIDI data,
such as karaoke lyrics, can be displayed. This
instrument supports this format, making it possible to view the lyrics on the display while a performance is played back.
䡲 GENERAL MIDI LEVEL 2 (GM2)
This instrument complies with GENERAL MIDI
(GM) LEVEL 2 standards. GM LEVEL 2 is a uniform world standard for MIDI sound generators
that improves on existing GM standards, in order
to realize an enhanced performance expression.
Sound generators of this class can reproduce virtually the identical conditions that were in effect
at the time of recording.
Equipment which conforms to GENERAL MIDI
LEVEL 2 standards is indicated by the following
logo.
• This instrument also conforms to GENERAL
MIDI playback.
118
QQTG0692
Part VI
Disk Drive (KN2400)
Outline of the procedure
1. Insert the disk into the Disk Drive slot. Push it
■ About the menu
all the way in until you hear a click.
• On this instrument, if the normal display is
active, it automatically changes to the DISK
MENU display when a disk is inserted into the
Disk Drive (initialized settings). The PREFERENCES menu is used to specify which display
is shown when a disk is inserted.
2. Select a menu on the DISK MENU display.
• If the DISK MENU display does not appear,
turn on the DISK button.
3. Follow the procedure for the function (see
below).
• When function is being set, if the
TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit, the
TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for setting
the current function.
4. When you have finished setting the functions,
turn off the DISK button.
DISK
DISK IN USE
SAVE (page 125)
Save data from this instrument’s memory to a
disk.
DIRECT PLAY (page 122)
Direct playback of SMF etc. commercial song
disks and medley playback.
SONG MEDLEY (page 124)
Medley playback of songs in the disk (Technics format).
DISK TOOLS (page 128)
Disk management procedures, such as disk
format.
LOAD
䡲 DISK IN USE
DISK
LOAD (page 120)
Load data from a disk into this instrument’s
memory.
DISK IN USE
PREFERENCES (page 130)
Used to specify which screen is to be jumped
to as well as the preferred file when a disk is
inserted.
This indicator lights when data is being loaded or
saved.
• To prevent data loss, do not eject the disk or
turn off the power while this indicator is lit.
DISK IN USE
DISK IN
USE
DISK
LOAD
This indicator is lit continuously
as long as the power is on.
119
QQTG0692
Disk Drive (KN2400)
11_Part VI.fm 119 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分
Disk Drive (KN2400)
11_Part VI.fm 120 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分
Part VI
Disk Drive (KN2400)
Loading data
Recall (load) the data from the disk to this instrument’s memories.
• Note that the load procedure causes any data which is currently stored in the relevant memories to be
erased.
LOAD
Load data that saved to a disk into this instrument’s memory.
1. Insert the disk with the stored data into the
Disk Drive. Push it all the way in until you hear
a click.
• You can load the type of data for which only
one song can be recorded in the
SEQUENCER. (This type is available for disks
used with older Technics models.) Note, however, that in this case, the song is loaded into
SONG 1, but the data in SONG memories 2 to
10 are erased.
• You can also access the LOAD display by
pressing the DISK button for a few seconds.
䡲 LOAD OPTION
Specify the kind of data you wish to load from the
disk to your instrument.
2. On the DISK MENU display, select LOAD.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to access the PAGE
• The display looks similar to the following.
2/3 LOAD OPTION display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• If there are only SMF files on the disk, the display automatically changes to the SMF LOAD
display.
3. Use the buttons below the display to select the
song (Technics file) you wish to load.
• If there are SMF files on the disk and you wish
to load an SMF file, press the SMF button.
(Refer to next page.)
4. Press the LOAD button.
• The LOAD operation begins.
• When the operation has been successfully
completed, “COMPLETED!” is shown on the
display.
• If song data was loaded, you can press the
START/STOP button to begin playback when
the SEQUENCER PLAY display is active.
120
QQTG0692
2. Use the buttons below the display to specify
the types of data you wish to load (YES/NO).
• - - - - - indicates that this type of data has not
been saved.
• This setting is canceled when you quit the
LOAD display or when another file is selected.
3. Press the LOAD button.
• The LOAD operation begins.
Part VI
䡲 SINGLE LOAD
You can specify which data to load from a disk
into a specific PANEL MEMORY, COMPOSER
(MEMORY), SOUND MEMORY, EFFECT
MEMORY or SEQUENCER (when SONG SAVE
was executed) memory.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to access the PAGE
3/3 SINGLE LOAD display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
Disk Drive (KN2400)
2. Use the buttons below the display to select the
filename you wish to load.
• If the number of files is 10 or more, you can
use the PREV and NEXT buttons to go back
or advance 10 files at a time.
• If you press the TECH button, the display
changes to the LOAD display for Technics format.
• You can use the INFORMATION button to
switch the displayed data.
DISK: Disk name
SONG: Song name
3. Use the TO SONG button to select the num-
2. Use the MODE button to select the data you
ber to load to (this instrument’s SEQUENCER
song number).
• Songs to load are specified one at a time.
• The song name to load to is shown below the
TO SONG button.
wish to load.
3. Use the BANK/SINGLE button to select the
load increment. (except for SEQUENCER)
BANK:
Load one bank at a time.
SINGLE:
Load the smallest data increment.
4. Follow the appropriate procedure to load the
specified data.
• Specify the data source for SONG (left side),
and the data destination (this instrument’s
memory location) for TO.
䡲 SMF LOAD
Load data which was saved in the “Standard
MIDI File” (SMF) format.
1. On the LOAD (PAGE 1/3) display, press the
SMF button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
4. Use the LOAD AS button to specify the load
method.
Select from the following.
GM/GM2 → GM2:
Activate the GM2 initialized settings, and
load GM/GM2 data.
NX → NX:
Active the NX SOUND settings, and load
NX data.
GM/GM2 → NX:
Activate the NX SOUND initialized settings,
and load GM/GM2 data.
PREV. TEC → NX:
Activate the NX SOUND initialized settings,
and load SMF data that was saved in the
TECHNICS mode on a previous model.
(The volume balance and octave settings
may differ from the saved settings.)
• If you select the setting which is different from
that in which the song was stored, the sounds,
octaves, and arrangement of percussion
instrument sounds, etc. will be different.
5. Press the LOAD button.
• For disks which contain SMF files only, this
display appears automatically when LOAD is
selected on the DISK MENU display.
• The LOAD operation begins.
• When the operation has been successfully
completed, “COMPLETED!” is shown on the
display.
• If you press the START/STOP button, playback of the loaded data begins.
• During the LOAD operation, data that cannot
be processed by this instrument is ignored.
121
QQTG0692
Disk Drive (KN2400)
11_Part VI.fm 121 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分
Disk Drive (KN2400)
11_Part VI.fm 122 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分
Part VI
Disk Drive (KN2400)
䡲 COMPOSER LOAD
Load COMPOSER data only from a disk.
1. In the RHYTHM GROUP section, press and
hold the LOAD (MEMORY) button for a few
seconds.
• The display looks similar to the following.
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
SIMPLE
BEAT
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
DANCE
CLUB
USA
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
TRAD &
WALTZ
2. Select the name of the file you wish to load.
3. Press the LOAD button.
MEMORY
• Data is loaded to this instrument’s COMPOSER memory (MEMORY).
LOAD
Direct Play
You can enjoy immediate playback of “Standard MIDI File” (SMF), “Disk Orchestra Collection” (DOC) and
“PianoDisc” disks—all without loading the song data.
1. Insert the disk with the stored data into the
Disk Drive.
2. On the DISK MENU display, select DIRECT
PLAY.
• The display looks similar to the following.
<Example: SMF>
• For SMF files, you can use the INFO button to
switch the displayed data.
DISK: Disk name
SONG: Song name
• For SMF files, use the MIDI OUT button to
specify whether or not MIDI data is output during playback (ON/OFF). (This cannot be
changed during playback.)
4. Press the START button.
• The selected song is played back.
3. Use the buttons below the display to select the
song you wish to have played.
• If the number of files is 10 or more, you can
use the PREV and NEXT buttons to go back
or advance 10 files at a time.
• For SMF files, use the PLAY AS button to
specify a sound arrangement mode.
GM2: GENERAL MIDI LEVEL 2
NX: NX SOUND
PREV. TEC: Data from Technics instruments
not having NX SOUND capability.
122
QQTG0692
䡲 Adjusting the playback tempo
Even with a song having recorded tempo data,
you can use TEMPO/PROGRAM or TAP
TEMPO to adjust the tempo to your liking.
• When the tempo is changed, all the tempo
data of that song is automatically changed by
the same ratio. Accordingly, even in song data
in which tempo change data is stored, a single
adjustment of the tempo produces a naturalsounding playback.
Part VI
Disk Drive (KN2400)
䡲 The display during playback
<Example: SMF>
䡲 MEDLEY PLAY
With DIRECT PLAY, songs saved on a disk can
be played back continuously in a medley.
1. On the DIRECT PLAY display, set the MED-
Next song
Fast forward
Play/pause
Stop
Previous song
• During playback, the buttons below the display
are used for player functions such as fast forward, pause, etc.
• During playback, if you press the MIXER button you can change the settings for each part.
• If you press the MIC button during playback,
the display changes to the MIC REVERB &
EFFECT setting display.
• For SMF disks:
For “SMF with LYRICS” disks, by pressing the
LYRICS button, the lyrics are shown on the
display.
For a “minus one” performance, use the
TRACK MUTE ∧, ∨ buttons to select the channel you wish to mute. Use the ON/OFF buttons and set the track you want to MUTE to
ON. Following this, you can play a keyboard
performance on the channel which was last
set to MUTE.
• For DOC disks:
You can use the PART 1, PART 2 and ORCH
(other accompaniment parts) buttons to set
the respective parts to ON or OFF.
• For PIANO DISC playback:
You can use the PART 1 and ORCH (other
accompaniment parts) buttons to set the
respective parts to ON or OFF.
LEY settings.
• If ALL is pressed, all the files are selected, and
the songs are played back in order in a medley. If ALL is pressed again, the files are deselected.
• You can use the buttons below the display to
select a song to add to the song list, then
press the ADD button to add it to the list.
Repeat these steps to create your own list of
songs to have played back. A M01, M02 etc.
next to the file name indicates its order in the
list.
• If the number of files is 10 or more, you can
use the PREV and NEXT buttons to go back
or advance 10 files at a time.
• You can delete a marked file from the medley
song list by selecting it and pressing the ADD
button.
• Use the LOOP button to specify ON or OFF
for repeat playback of the medley.
2. Press the START button.
• Medley playback begins.
• During medley playback, you can use the
SKIP button to skip to the next song.
123
QQTG0692
Disk Drive (KN2400)
11_Part VI.fm 123 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分
Disk Drive (KN2400)
11_Part VI.fm 124 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分
Part VI
Disk Drive (KN2400)
Song Medley
Songs saved from the SEQUENCER to a disk (disk data) in the TECHNICS FORMAT can be played back
in a medley.
1. On the DISK MENU display, select SONG
MEDLEY from the display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Select the order of files in the medley.
• If ALL is pressed, all the files are selected, and
the songs are played back in numerical in a
medley.
• You can select a file and song, then press the
ADD button to add it to the song list. Repeat
these steps to create your own list of songs to
have played back. A M01, M02 etc. next to the
file name indicates its order in the list.
• You can delete a marked file from the medley
song list by selecting it and pressing the ADD
button.
• Use the LOOP button to specify ON or OFF
for repeat playback of the medley.
• You can use the MODE button to select the
medley mode.
10 SNGS:
Songs 1 to 10 from each SONG are
played in a medley.
1 SONG:
Only song 1 from each SONG is played
back in a medley.
3. Press the START button.
• Medley playback begins.
• During the performance, the display changes
to the playback display.
• During a medley performance, if you press the
MIXER button you can change the settings for
each part.
• During a medley performance, you can use
the SKIP button to skip to the next song.
• If the disk contains SMF or other files, but no
TECHNICS FORMAT file, the display changes
to the DIRECT PLAY display.
124
QQTG0692
Part VI
Disk Drive (KN2400)
Saving data
The recorded data and panel settings of this instrument can be saved on a disk.
Disks
You can use 3.5 inch 2DD (720KB) or 2HD
(1.44MB) disks.
• How to distinguish the two disk types:
2DD
No hole
2HD
• When saving data to the disk, the write-protect
tab must be closed.
Storage is not
possible
Storage is
possible
Hole
• Although 2HD disks can hold more data and
are convenient for quick loading and saving,
some models may be able to read only 2DD
disks. Therefore, you may not be able to use
your 2HD disk data with other musical instrument models.
Open
Closed
SAVE
1. Insert a formatted disk into the Disk Drive slot.
Push it all the way in until you hear a click.
• A disk which is used with this instrument for
the first time must first be formatted.
2. On the DISK MENU display, select SAVE.
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Select the type of data save you want.
TECHNICS FORMAT:
Save this instrument’s data in the Technics
File format.
SMF FORMAT 0:
Save the SEQUENCER data in the “Standard MIDI File” format (FORMAT 0).
125
QQTG0692
Disk Drive (KN2400)
11_Part VI.fm 125 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分
Disk Drive (KN2400)
11_Part VI.fm
126 ページ 2003年3月6日 木曜日 午後2時48分
Part VI
䡲 TECHNICS FORMAT
1. Use the buttons below the display to specify
the file number you wish to save to.
• The types of data that can be saved are
shown in a frame on the right side of the
display. If you press the SAVE button, all the
indicated data is saved. Ordinarily PERFORMANCE data is selected, but you can use the
SAVE OPTION to select specific data to save.
Disk Drive (KN2400)
3. Use the buttons below the display to assign a
name.
• Set the character input position with the POSITION buttons, select the characters with the
alphanumeric buttons and repeat name
assignment.
• Press the INS button to enter a space at the
cursor position.
• Press the DEL button to erase the character at
the cursor position.
• Press the CLR button to erase the entire
name.
• Press the →← button to center the name.
4. Press the OK button.
• The display returns to the SAVE display.
5. Press the SAVE button.
2. If you wish to assign a name to the file, press
the NAME button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• The SAVE operation begins.
• If you attempt to save data to a file number in
which data is currently saved, the display
changes to the confirmation display. Press the
YES button to continue the SAVE procedure,
or press the NO button if you wish to cancel it.
<SAVE OPTION>
Specify the kind of data you wish to save to the
disk. To maximize effective use of disk memory
or to minimize the save time, select only the type
of data you wish to save.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to access the 2/3
SAVE OPTION display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the buttons below the display to specify
the types of data you wish to save (YES/NO).
• For PANEL MEMORY, select from NO/1
BANK/ALL.
Selecting 1 BANK will save only bank A.
• Press the PERFORM button to select all the
performance data, or press the BACKUP button to select all the back up data at once.
• If the ALL OFF button is pressed, all the settings change to NO.
3. Press the SAVE button.
• The SAVE operation begins.
126
QQTG0692
Part VI
<SEQUENCER SONG SAVE>
You can specify a single song
SEQUENCER to save to the disk.
Disk Drive (KN2400)
in
the
1. Use the PAGE buttons to access the 3/3
SEQUENCER SONG SAVE display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
䡲 SMF FORMAT 0
This instrument’s SEQUENCER data can be
saved in the “Standard MIDI File” format (FORMAT 0) for use on other instruments.
• What you can save in the SMF format (FORMAT 0) is ordinary performance data, such as
note data. Data such as chord and rhythm
data, COMPOSER data, etc. is not saved. If
you wish to also save this special Technics
data, save the data in the Technics File format.
• If you use the APC TO SMF CONVERT function of the SEQUENCER, you can convert the
patterns of the automatic accompaniment, etc.
to SMF data. (Refer to page 100.)
2. Use the buttons below the display to select the
song number you wish to save.
3. Press the SAVE button.
• The SAVE operation begins.
1. To overwrite a file, use the ▲ and ▼ buttons
and then select a song name.
• If the number of files is 10 or more, you can
use the PREV and NEXT buttons to go back
or advance 10 files at a time.
2. If you wish to assign a name to the file, press
the NAME button.
3. Use the buttons below the display to assign a
name.
4. Press the OK button.
• The display returns to the SAVE display.
5. Use the FROM SONG buttons to select the
SEQUENCER song number you wish to save.
• The song name to save from is shown below
the FROM SONG button.
6. Use the PANEL HEADER buttons to specify
ON or OFF.
ON:
The sound and volume settings for each
part are saved as data at the beginning of
the file.
OFF:
This data is not saved.
(Continued on the next page)
127
QQTG0692
Disk Drive (KN2400)
11_Part VI.fm 127 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分
Disk Drive (KN2400)
11_Part VI.fm 128 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分
Part VI
7. Use the 1 MEASURE SPACE buttons to
select ON or OFF.
ON:
A one-measure space is added to the
beginning of the file.
OFF:
No space is added.
• When there is various data other than performance data stored at the beginning of a file,
the start of playback may be delayed. This can
be avoided by set the 1 MEASURE SPACE to
ON to inserting a before the beginning of the
performance.
• When set to ON, a space is added each time a
file is saved. Therefore, if you have already
saved a file once with the 1 MEASURE
SPACE set to ON, please set it to OFF each
time the file is subsequently saved.
Disk Drive (KN2400)
8. Use the SAVE AS button to select the sound
generator mode (GM/GM2/NX).
9. Press the SAVE button.
• The SAVE operation begins.
• When the operation has been successfully
completed, “COMPLETED!” is shown on the
display.
• If you attempt to save data to a file name in
which data is currently saved, the display
changes to the confirmation display. Press the
YES button to continue the SAVE procedure,
or press the NO button if you wish to cancel it.
Disk management
Various disk management procedures, such as file delete, file copy, and disk format, are available from
the DISK TOOLS menu.
DISK TOOLS
1. Insert the disk into the Disk Drive slot.
䡲 RENAME:
Assign a name to a file.
2. On the DISK MENU display, select DISK
TOOLS from the display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
䡲 DEL:
Delete a file.
䡲 COPY (TECH):
Copy a file.
䡲 MOVE (TECH):
Replace a file.
䡲 INFO (DISK/SONG) (SMF files only):
3. Select a function and follow the procedure to
execute it.
• Use the buttons below the display to select a
file.
• You can press the SMF/TECH button to
change to the display for procedures related to
SMF/TECH files.
• Use the buttons to the left and right of the display to access the corresponding setting display.
128
QQTG0692
Select whether to display the disk data or the
song names.
䡲 FORMAT
Disks which are used for the first time with this
instrument have to be formatted through the following procedure. When an unformatted disk is
inserted into the Disk Drive slot and you attempt
to execute the save or load procedure, the DISK
FORMAT display appears. Follow the instructions shown to format the disk.
Part VI
Disk Drive (KN2400)
• Note that this procedure clears any data which
is currently stored on the disk.
1. Select the type of format (2DD or 2HD).
• Be sure to select the type which is the same
as your disk type.
• If the type is automatically detected, the display changes directly to the following display,
without showing the type select display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• If you wish to select the type again, use the
PAGE button to access the PAGE 2/2 display.
2. Press the YES button to format the disk, or
press the NO button to cancel the format.
• When the YES button is pressed, disk format
begins. After about 1–2 minutes, formatting is
completed and DISK NAMING display is
shown.
3. Use the buttons below the display to assign a
name.
• Set the character input position with the POSITION buttons, select the characters with the
alphanumeric buttons and repeat name
assignment.
• Switch from upper to lower case letters with
the ABC, abc button.
• Press the INS button to enter a space at the
cursor position.
• Press the DEL button to erase the character at
the cursor position.
• Press the CLR button to erase the entire
name.
• Press the →← button to center the name.
4. Press the OK button.
129
QQTG0692
Disk Drive (KN2400)
11_Part VI.fm 129 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分
Disk Drive (KN2400)
11_Part VI.fm 130 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時43分
Part VI
Disk Drive (KN2400)
Set the automatic display when a disk is
inserted
When a disk is inserted in the Disk Drive, the display automatically changes to a disk-procedure display.
Follow this procedure to customize the automatic display.
PREFERENCES
1. On the DISK MENU display, select PREFERENCES.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select the item, and the ∧ and ∨ buttons to
change the setting.
DISK INSERT OPTION:
The display automatically changes to a diskprocedure display when a disk is inserted in
the Disk Drive (OFF, DISK MENU, LOAD,
DIRECT PLAY, SONG MEDLEY).
• During playback, recording or changing the
settings, the displays unrelated to the settings
made here do not change.
FILE TYPE PRIORITY:
Specify the desired priority ranking of displayed files when several types of files are
recorded on one disk (TECHNICS/SMF).
3. Press the OK button.
130
QQTG0692
12_Part VII.fm 131 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分
The data generated by this instrument can be stored and managed on an SD card in SMF or TECHNICS
format.
Structure of the SD card format
SD-AUDIO
Music (audio) data
SD-SOUND
SMF data
PRIVATE
local data of the instrument
Management inner memory data
The instrument inner memory data can be managed using the high space capacity of the SD
card. The data which can be saved and loaded is
same as the DISK DRIVE (KN2400). (See page
119.)
Play an SD card
Besides saving, you can enjoy playback of audio
or SMF data saved on the SD card. (Refer to
pages 136, 137.)
SD-AUDIO
AUDIO data stored on an SD card using SD
format software.
SD-SOUND
SMF data (SD-SOUND format) saved on the
SD card
Outline of the procedure
1. Open the lid of the SD slot.
3. Close the lid.
• Open it completely.
2. Insert the SD card.
• No operation is possible when the lid is open.
4. Press the SD button to turn it on.
SD
SD IN USE
LOAD
5. Select a menu on the SD MENU display.
• Push the card until it locks as shown in the figure.
6. Follow the procedure for the function (see
below).
• When function is being set, if the
TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit, the
TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for setting
the current function.
131
QQTG0692
SD Card (KN2600)
Part VII SD Card (KN2600)
Outline of the SD card
12_Part VII.fm 132 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分
Part VII
SD Card (KN2600)
7. When you have finished setting the functions,
䡲 Removing the SD card
press the SD button to turn it off.
SD Card (KN2600)
䡲 SD IN USE
SD
SD IN USE
LOAD
• This indicator lights when accessing to the SD
card.
To prevent data loss, do not eject the card or
turn off the power while this indicator is lit.
When the SD IN USE indicator is not lit, while
opening the lid, push the center of the card to
unlock it.
Attention
Note that no sound is produced when performing SD card operations, such as LOAD or
SAVE. Also, the instrument produces no
sound when one of following displays appears
(The keyboard will emit sound.):
• LOAD (TECH) PAGE 3
• SD SONG MEDLEY
• COPY FROM DISK (SD TOOLS)
• SD-SOUND EXPORT/IMPORT
(SD-TOOLS)
䡲 SD MENU
SD-AUDIO PLAY (page 136)
Play back audio data stored on the card.
SD-SOUND PLAY (page 137)
Play directory SD-SOUND (SMF) data on the
card.
LOAD (page 130)
Load data into this instrument from the card.
SD SONG MEDLEY (page 139)
Play back music data on the card (TECHNICS
format) successively in a medley.
SAVE (page 140)
Save data on the card from this instrument.
SD TOOLS (page 144)
Card management procedures, such as card
format.
FAVORITE SONGS (page 143)
Arrange the order of your favorite songs
stored on the card.
SD PREFERENCES (page 145)
Set the priority for displaying while saving or
loading data.
132
QQTG0692
12_Part VII.fm
133 ページ
2003年3月9日 日曜日 午後3時5分
Part VII
SD Card (KN2600)
Loading data
SD LOAD
Load data that saved to a card into this instrument’s memory.
1. Insert the SD card with the stored data into the
SD slot. (See page 131.)
• Close the lid securely.
select the type of loading.
2. Press the SD button to turn it on.
SD
4. Use the buttons to the right of the display to
FOLDER:
Select files to load from a list of all folders and
of saved songs in each folder.
SD IN USE
LOAD
3. On the SD MENU display, select LOAD.
• The display looks similar to the following.
ALPHABET (See page 134.)
Select files to load from an alphabetical list of
all songs.
NUMBER (See page 134.)
Select files to load specifying folder and song
numbers.
• The priority that sets which display is shown
first can be set at the SD PREFERENCES display. (Refer to page 145.)
• If there are only SMF files on the card, the display automatically changes to the SD-SOUND
(SMF) LOAD display.
䡲 FOLDER
2. Press the LOAD button.
1. Use the buttons below the display to select the
SONG you wish to load.
• Select the folder name first, and then select
the SONG name.
• Press the PREV button for the previous page
and the NEXT button for the next page.
• The LOAD operation begins.
• When the operation has been successfully
completed, “COMPLETED!” is shown on the
display.
• If song data was loaded, you can press the
START/STOP button to begin playback when
the SEQUENCER PLAY display is active.
• You can load the type of data for which only
one song can be recorded in the SEQUENCER. (This type is available for cards used
with older Technics models.) Note, however,
that in this case, the song is loaded into
SONG 1, but the data in SONG memories 2 to
10 are erased.
• You can also access the LOAD display by
pressing the SD button for a few seconds.
133
QQTG0692
SD Card (KN2600)
Load the data from the SD card to this instrument’s memories.
• Note that the load procedure causes any data which is currently stored in the relevant memories to be
erased.
12_Part VII.fm
134 ページ
2003年3月9日 日曜日 午後3時5分
Part VII
SD Card (KN2600)
䡲 ALPHABET
Load the file from an alphabetical list of all songs
saved in TECHNICS format on the SD card.
1. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the alphabetical letter or the display page.
SD Card (KN2600)
䡲 NUMBER
From all songs saved in the TECHNICS FORMAT on the SD card, select a song by specifying
the song number.
1. Use the buttons below the display to specify
2. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to specify the song
to be loaded.
• Press the PREV button for the previous page
and the NEXT button for the next page.
the song number.
• Specify the FOLDER (01–99) first, and then
select the SONG (01–20).
• A number should be specifyed as a 2-digits
number. (Press 0, 1 for the number 1.)
3. Press the LOAD button.
2. Press the LOAD button.
<LOAD OPTION>
Specify the kind of data you wish to load from the
SD card to your instrument.
<SINGLE LOAD>
You can specify which data to load from an SD
card into a specific PANEL MEMORY, COMPOSER (MEMORY), SOUND MEMORY,
EFFECT MEMORY or SEQUENCER (when
SONG SAVE was executed) memory.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to access the PAGE
2/3 display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to access the PAGE
3/3 display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the buttons below the display to specify
the types of data you wish to load (YES/NO).
• - - - - - indicates that this type of data has not
been saved.
• This setting is canceled when you quit the
LOAD display or when another file is selected.
2. Use the MODE button to select the data you
wish to load.
3. Use the BANK/SINGLE button to select the
3. Press the LOAD button.
• The LOAD operation begins.
load increment. (except for SEQUENCER)
BANK:
Load one bank at a time.
SINGLE:
Load the smallest data increment.
4. Follow the appropriate procedure to load the
specified data.
• Specify the data source for SONG (left side),
and the data destination (this instrument’s
memory location) for TO.
134
QQTG0692
135 ページ
2003年3月9日 日曜日 午後3時5分
Part VII
SD Card (KN2600)
䡲 COMPOSER LOAD
Load COMPOSER data only from a card.
1. In the RHYTHM GROUP section, press and
hold the LOAD (MEMORY) button for a few
seconds.
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
SIMPLE
BEAT
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
DANCE
CLUB
USA
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
TRAD &
WALTZ
2. Use the buttons below the display to select the
SONG name you wish to load.
• Use the PLAYLIST button to specify the
PLAYLIST (see page 138), the SONG
SELECT button to specify the SONG.
• If you press the PLAYLIST EDIT button, the
display changes to the PLAYLIST EDIT display. (See page 138.)If you press the TECH
button, the display changes to the LOAD display for the TECHNICS SONG.
3. Use the TO SONG button to select the numMEMORY
LOAD
ber to load to (this instrument’s SEQUENCER
song number).
• Songs to load are specified one at a time.
• The SEQUENCER song name to load to is
shown below the TO SONG button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
4. Use the LOAD AS button to specify the load
method.
• Select from the following.
GM/GM2 → GM2:
Activate the GM2 initialized settings, and
load GM/GM2 data.
2. Use the buttons below the display to select the
SONG you wish to load.
• Select the folder name first, and then select
the SONG name.
• Press the PREV button for the previous page
and the NEXT button for the next page.
3. Press the LOAD button.
• Data is loaded to this instrument’s COMPOSER memory (MEMORY).
SD-SOUND LOAD (SMF)
NX → NX:
Active the NX SOUND settings, and load
NX data.
GM/GM2 → NX:
Activate the NX SOUND initialized settings,
and load GM/GM2 data.
PREV. TEC → NX:
Activate the NX SOUND initialized settings,
and load SMF data that was saved in the
TECHNICS mode on a previous model.
(The volume balance and octave settings
may differ from the saved settings.)
1. On the LOAD (PAGE 1/3) display, press the
• If you select the setting which is different from
that in which the song was stored, the sounds,
octaves, and arrangement of percussion
instrument sounds, etc. will be different.
SD-SOUND button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
5. Press the LOAD button.
Load SD-SOUND (SMF) data from the SD card.
• The LOAD operation begins.
• When the operation has been successfully
completed, “COMPLETED!” is shown on the
display.
• If you press the START/STOP button, playback of the loaded data begins.
• For cards which contain SD-SOUND data
only, this display appears automatically when
LOAD is selected on the SD MENU display.
• During the LOAD operation, data that cannot
be processed by this instrument is ignored.
135
QQTG0692
SD Card (KN2600)
12_Part VII.fm
12_Part VII.fm 136 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分
Part VII
SD Card (KN2600)
SD-Audio Play
Play back audio data on the SD card saved by a PC, etc.
SD Card (KN2600)
1. Insert the SD card with the stored data to be
played into the SD slot. (See page 131.)
4. Playback the data by pressing the button
below the display.
• Close the lid securely after inserting the card.
2. Press the SD button to turn it on.
SD
SD IN USE
LOAD
3. On the SD MENU display, select SD-AUDIO
PLAY.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• Using the PLAY MODE button, you can select
the type of playback.
NORMAL:
For playing back the songs in sequential
order.
ALL REPEAT:
For playing back all the songs repetitively.
1 SONG REPEAT:
For playing back a song repetitively.
• You can select PLAY LIST using the PLAYLIST SELECT button as necessary.
136
QQTG0692
Volume
Stop
Playback/
Pause
Skip to the next, Fast
forward (hold the button)
Skip to the previous, Rewind
(hold the button)
• Adjust the volume for playback using the VOL
∧ and ∨ buttons.
12_Part VII.fm 137 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分
Part VII
SD Card (KN2600)
SD-Sound Play
1. Insert the SD card with the stored data to be
played into the SD slot. (See page 131.)
• Close the lid securely after inserting the card.
2. Press the SD button to turn it on.
3. On the SD MENU display, select SD-SOUND
PLAY.
• The display looks similar to the following.
4. Press the buttons above the display to play
• To have a minus-one play, use the ∧ and ∨
buttons to select a part or parts and set
ON/OFF to the part. The part being muted last
is assigned to the keyboard, so that you can
play the part with the keyboard. You can also
assign the part to play with the keyboard using
the CONDUCTOR.
• Adjust the volume for playback using VOL.
䡲 Adjusting the playback tempo
Even with a song having recorded tempo data,
you can use TEMPO/PROGRAM or TAP
TEMPO to adjust the tempo to your liking.
• When the tempo is changed, all the tempo
data of that song is automatically changed by
the same ratio. Accordingly, even in song data
in which tempo change data is stored, a single
adjustment of the tempo produces a naturalsounding playback.
back the data.
• For the function of each button, see page 136.
• Press the PLAYLIST SELECT button to select
a PLAYLIST.
• Using the PLAY MODE button, you can select
the type of playback.
NORMAL:
For playing back the songs in sequential
order.
ALL REPEAT:
For playing back all the songs repetitively.
1 SONG:
For playing back only one song.
1 SONG REPEAT:
For playing back a single song repetitively.
• Press the LYRICS button to show the lyrics.
• The PLAY AS button functions like as the
LOAD AS button. (Refer to page 135.)
137
QQTG0692
SD Card (KN2600)
Play back SMF data saved on the SD card (SD-SOUND).
• Lyrics of the SMF with LYRICS files can be also displayed.
12_Part VII.fm 138 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分
Part VII
SD Card (KN2600)
Playlist
SD Card (KN2600)
The instrument handles the SD-AUDIO/SD-SOUND files in PLAYLIST units. The explanation of the
PLAYLIST is as follows.
PLAYLIST type
There are two types of PLAYLIST.
<DEFAULT PLAYLIST: (Total list)>
A collection of all data saved in an SD card. If
you delete a song from the default PLAYLIST,
the song data itself will be deleted on the card.
<PLAYLIST>
When the music data is transferred to the SD
card from a PC, a play list is created automatically on the card. You can freely name this type
of play lists. Also, you can create a new PLAYLIST which contains your favorite songs selected
from the DEFAULT PLAYLIST or other PLAYLISTs.
MEMO
You can create PLAYLISTs on an SD card
within the following limits.
• Maximum number of PLAYLISTs: 99
• Maximum number of songs: 999
• Maximum number of songs in a PLAYLIST:
99
PLAYLIST EDIT
You can edit a PLAYLIST for SD-SOUND freely
except for the DEFAULT PLAYLIST.
• You can edit the DEFAULT PLAYLIST on the
SD TOOLS display. (Refer to page 144.)
1. On the PLAYLIST SELECT display, press the
EDIT button.
• The PLAYLIST SELECT display appears
when you press the PLAYLIST SELECT button on the SD-SOUND display. (Refer to page
137.)
• The display looks similar to the following.
• Press the DEL button to delete the songs
which are currently selected on the “Target
Playlist.”
• Press the PLAYLIST NEW button to select a
new, blank PLAYLIST as a TARGET PLAYLIST.
• Press the PLAYLIST DEL button to delete
PLAYLIST which is currently selected as TARGET PLAYLIST.
• Press the TARGET PLAYLIST NAMING button to name the PLAYLIST which is being currently edited.
3. Press the OK button.
2. Edit the PLAYLIST.
• Select the songs to copy from in the left column of the display, assign to them desired
song numbers for the TARGET PLAYLIST
and press the SET button. This creates a new
PLAYLIST of the selected songs with
assigned song numbers.
• Use the MOVE button to change the order of
the songs.
138
QQTG0692
12_Part VII.fm 139 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分
Part VII
SD Card (KN2600)
SD Song Medley
1. On the SD MENU display, select SD SONG
MEDLEY.
• The display looks similar to the following.
䡲 Making a USER LIST
You can create up to three USER LISTs.
1. Select one of three USER LISTs (1 to 3) using
the MODE button and then press the USER
LIST EDIT button.
2. Specify the order of songs to play in medley.
2. Press the MODE button to select the type of
medley list.
ALL SONG:
A list of all songs in all folders
• Select FOLDER and SONG, specify the
sequence of songs in the LIST column to the
right, press the SET button, and repeat those
steps.
• Press the DEL button to delete the songs
selected in the LIST column.
• The USER LIST settings are memorised independently on each card.
FOLDER:
A list of all songs in a selected folder.
• Press the FOLDER SELECT button to
select the folder to play.
USER LIST 1-3:
Lists which can be set freely. (See below.)
• Use the LOOP button to specify ON or OFF
for repeat playback of the medley.
• You can use the INTERNAL button to select
the medley mode.
10 SNGS:
Songs 1 to 10 from each SONG are played
in a medley.
1 SONG:
Only song 1 from each SONG is played
back in a medley.
3. Press the START button.
• Medley playback begins.
• During the performance, the display changes
to the playback display.
• During a medley performance, if you press the
MIXER button you can change the settings for
each part.
• During a medley performance, you can use
the SKIP button to skip to the next song.
139
QQTG0692
SD Card (KN2600)
Songs saved from the SEQUENCER to an SD card in the TECHNICS FORMAT can be played back in a
melody.
12_Part VII.fm 140 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分
Part VII
SD Card (KN2600)
Saving Data
SD Card (KN2600)
The internal data of this instrument can be saved on the SD card.
SAVE
1. Insert an SD card for saving into the SD slot.
4. Select the type of data save you want.
(See page 131.)
2. Press SD button to turn it on.
3. On the SD MENU display, select SAVE.
• The display looks similar to the following.
TECHNICS FORMAT:
Save this instrument’s data in the Technics
File format.
SD-SOUND (SMF) FORMAT:
Save the SEQUENCER data as SD-SOUND
(SMF) data.
䡲 TECHNICS FORMAT
3. Use the buttons below the display to assign a
1. Use the buttons below the display to specify
the song number you wish to save to.
• Select the FOLDER number first, and select
the SONG number.
• The types of data that can be saved are
shown in a frame on the right side of the
display. If you press the SAVE button, all the
indicated data is saved. Ordinarily PERFORMANCE data is selected, but you can use the
SAVE OPTION to select specific data to save.
2. If you wish to assign a name to the file, press
the SONG NAMING button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
140
QQTG0692
name.
• Set the character input position with the POSITION buttons, select the characters with the
alphanumeric buttons and repeat name
assignment.
• Switch from upper to lower case letters with
the ABC, abc button.
• Press the INS button to enter a space at the
cursor position.
• Press the DEL button to erase the character at
the cursor position.
• Press the CLR button to erase the entire
name.
• Press the →← button to center the name.
4. Press the OK button.
• The display returns to the SAVE display.
• If you wish to assign a name to the folder,
press the FOLDER RENAME button and follow the operation described above.
5. Press the SAVE button.
• The SAVE operation begins.
• If you attempt to save data to a SONG number
in which data is currently saved, the display
changes to the confirmation display. Press the
YES button to continue the SAVE procedure,
or press the NO button if you wish to cancel it.
12_Part VII.fm 141 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分
Part VII
SD Card (KN2600)
<SAVE OPTION>
Specify the kind of data you wish to save to the
SD card. To maximize effective use of SD card
memory or to minimize the save time, select only
the type of data you wish to save.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to access the 3/3 dis-
1. Use the PAGE buttons to access the 2/3 dis-
play.
• The display looks similar to the following.
SD Card (KN2600)
<SEQUENCER SONG SAVE>
You can specify a single song in the SEQUENCER to save to the SD card.
play.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the buttons below the display to select the
song number you wish to save.
2. Use the buttons below the display to specify
the types of data you wish to save (YES/NO).
• For PANEL MEMORY, select from NO/1
BANK/ALL.
Selecting 1 BANK will save only bank A.
• Press the PERFORM button to select all the
performance data, or press the BACKUP button to select all the back up data at once.
• If the ALL OFF button is pressed, all the settings change to NO.
3. Press the SAVE button.
• The SAVE operation begins.
MEMO
You can save data on an SD card within the
limits as follows.
• Maximum number of folders: 99
• Maximum number of songs in a folder: 20
Maximum number of letters for the song or
folder name: 16
3. Press the SAVE button.
• The SAVE operation begins.
䡲 SD-SOUND (SMF) FORMAT
This instrument’s SEQUENCER data can be
saved in the SD-SOUND format. SD-SOUND
data can be converted to the “Standard MIDI
File” (SMF Fromat 0) format for use on other
instruments.
• What you can save in the SMF format (FORMAT 0) is ordinary performance data, such as
note data. Data such as chord and rhythm
data, COMPOSER data, etc. is not saved. If
you wish to also save this special Technics
data, save the data in the Technics File format.
• If you use the APC TO SMF CONVERT function of the SEQUENCER, you can convert the
patterns of the automatic accompaniment, etc.
to SMF data. (Refer to page 100.)
1. To overwrite a song number that already has
data, use the buttons below the display to
select the song number you wish to save to.
2. If you wish to assign a name to the file, press
the NAME button.
3. Use the buttons below the display to assign a
name.
4. Press the OK button.
• The display returns to the SAVE display.
(Continued on the next page)
141
QQTG0692
12_Part VII.fm 142 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分
Part VII
5. Use the FROM SONG buttons to select the
SD Card (KN2600)
SEQUENCER song number you wish to save.
• The song name to save from is shown below
the FROM SONG button.
6. Use the PANEL HEADER buttons to specify
ON or OFF.
ON:
The sound and volume settings for each
part are saved as data at the beginning of
the file.
OFF:
This data is not saved.
7. Use the 1 MEASURE SPACE buttons to
select ON or OFF.
ON:
A one-measure space is added to the
beginning of the file.
OFF:
No space is added.
• When there is various data other than performance data stored at the beginning of a file,
the start of playback may be delayed. This can
be avoided by set the 1 MEASURE SPACE to
ON to inserting a before the beginning of the
performance.
• When set to ON, a space is added each time a
file is saved. Therefore, if you have already
saved a file once with the 1 MEASURE
SPACE set to ON, please set it to OFF each
time the file is subsequently saved.
8. Use the SAVE AS button to select the sound
generator mode (GM/GM2/NX).
9. Press the SAVE button.
• The SAVE operation begins.
• When the operation has been successfully
completed, “COMPLETED!” is shown on the
display.
• If you attempt to save data to a file number in
which data is currently saved, the display
changes to the confirmation display. Select
the type of data saving.
AT CURSOR LOCATION:
The song is saved to where the cursor is
currently located (overwrite).
AT A NEW LOCATION:
The song is saved as a newly added data
with the last song number.
142
QQTG0692
SD Card (KN2600)
12_Part VII.fm 143 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分
Part VII
SD Card (KN2600)
Create an album of your favorite songs
FAVORITE SONGS
1. Insert the SD card which contains the songs
into the SD slot.
6. Select the song.
• The TECHNICS files and SD-SOUND songs
are selected differently.
2. Press the SD button to turn it on.
7. Press and hold the SET button, and select
3. On the SD MENU display, select FAVORITE
SONGS.
• The display looks similar to the following.
the location to put the song.
8. Press the BANK NAMING button to name
the BANK.
9. Repeat the steps 5 and 6.
10. When you have finished making the settings,
press the OK button.
4. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the BANK
to use.
• Press the +10 button to jump up to the next
group of 10 selections, press the –10 button to
jump down a group.
5. Press the FAVORITE SETTING button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
䡲 Recalling the FAVORITE SONGS display
1. On the SD MENU display, select FAVORITE
SONGS.
2. Select the BANK.
3. Select the song.
• The load operation begins.
143
QQTG0692
SD Card (KN2600)
The FAVORITE SONGS display allows you to create an album of your favorite songs which are aligned in
a desired order, making it easy to load your favorite song to play back immediately.
12_Part VII.fm 144 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分
Part VII
SD Card (KN2600)
SD card management
SD Card (KN2600)
Various SD card management procedures, such as file delete, file copy, card format, and file rename are
available from the SD TOOLS menu.
SD TOOLS
1. Insert the SD card to manage into the SD slot.
2. Press the SD button to turn it on.
3. On the SD MENU display, select SD TOOLS.
• The display looks similar to the following.
䡲 SD-SOUND TOOLS
SONG DELETE:
When selecting a PLAYLIST other than the
DEFAULT PLAYLIST, the specified SONG
will be deleted from all the PLAYLISTs.
SONG RENAME:
Change the name of a SONG.
SD-SOUND EXPORT:
4. Select a function and follow the procedure to
execute it.
• You can press the SD-SOUND/TECH button
to change to the display for setting relevant file
types.
• If you press the FORMAT button, the display
changes to the format display for SD CARD.
(The current contents of the SD card are
erased when the card is formatted.)
䡲 TECH TOOLS
SONG DELETE:
Delete a song.
Convert SD-SOUND data to generic SMF
data for use on an external instrument.
• SONGs in a specified PLAYLIST except for
DEFAULT PLAYLIST are exported to the
“IMEXPORT” directory at one time.
• Pressing ALL DELETE will delete all files;
however, “read only” files will not be deleted.
SD-SOUND IMPORT:
SONG/FOLDER RENAME:
Change the name of a SONG or FOLDER.
COPY:
Copy songs on the SD card. Specify the
FOLDER first and then the SONG to copy
to.
Convert SMF data on the SD card to SDSOUND data for use on this instrument.
• SMF files in the “IMEXPORT” directory are
imported as SD-SOUND data, and they are
used to create a new PLAYLIST.
• Specify the SMF files you wish to import
using the SEL buttons. A “∗” mark is shown
on the selected files.
144
QQTG0692
12_Part VII.fm 145 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時47分
Part VII
SD Card (KN2600)
Set the priority of displays
Specify the desired priority of displays when the LOAD button is pressed on the control panel.
SD Card (KN2600)
SD PREFERENCES
1. On the SD MENU display, select SD PREFERENCES.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to choose the SONG
SELECT METHOD.
• Specify the top priority of the type of LOAD
displays, when LOAD is selected on the
SD MENU display (FOLDER LIST/LOAD
BY NUMBER/ALPHABET SORT/SD-SOUND
LOAD).
3. Press the OK button.
145
QQTG0692
13_Part VIII.fm
146 ページ
2003年3月6日 木曜日 午後1時35分
Part VIII Sound
Outline of the Sound
The SOUND mode is used for making fine adjustments to the functions related to sound, such as tone,
and tuning.
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
on.
4. Follow the procedures on the corresponding
menu display.
PROGRAM
MENUS
• When the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit,
it indicates that the TEMPO/PROGRAM is
available for setting the current function.
Sound
5. When you have finished setting the functions,
• The display looks similar to the following.
press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
off.
䡲 A word about parts
The organization of the sound parts is as follows.
Normal parts:
RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT, PART 1 to 16
• It is suggested that PART 10 be used for the
DRUMS part.
2. Select SOUND.
• The display looks similar to the following.
AUTO PLAY CHORD (automatic accompaniment) parts:
ACCOMP 1–5, BASS, DRUMS 1, 2, CHORD,
R.BASS.
PERFORMANCE PADS part:
PADS
3. Select the desired menu.
Summary of the SOUND menu items
PART SETTING (page 147)
Set the various sound attributes for each
part.
TECHNI-CHORD
Select the TECHNI-CHORD harmony style.
(Refer to page 47.)
MIXER (page 150)
Use the MIXER display to visually adjust
the major settings of each part.
APC REVERB SETTING (page 154)
Adjust the degree of REVERB for each
automatic accompaniment part.
MASTER TUNING (page 152)
Select the type of tuning for the instrument.
SOUND ARRANGER
Changes the sound of each automatic
accompaniment part. (Refer to page 59.)
KEY SCALING (page 152)
Select the type of scaling (tuning).
SOUND LOAD OPTION (page 153)
Specify whether the various data accompanying a sound, such as effects, are used
when the sound is recalled.
146
QQTG0692
13_Part VIII.fm
147 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時51分
Part VIII
Sound
Part Setting
Set the various sound attributes for each part.
Selecting an attribute
1. On the SOUND MENU display, select PART
SETTING.
2. Use the PART SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to
3. Use the buttons below the display to adjust
each attribute (explained in detail following).
• The settings display is comprised of 5 pages.
Use the PAGE buttons to switch pages.
• When you have completed adjustment of an
attribute, use the buttons along the bottom of
the display to select the next attribute you wish
to adjust.
select the part.
4. When you have completed adjusting all of the
• The settings and effects of the PAN, EFFECT
etc. may differ depending on the sound.
<PAGE 1>
SOUND:
Use the SOUND ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a
sound.
• The buttons on the control panel may also be
used to select a sound.
VOLUME:
Use the VOL ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the volume (0 to 127).
PAN:
Use the PAN ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the stereo balance (L64–CENTER(CTR)–R63).
• At L64, the sound is completely to the left, at
R63 completely to the right. At CENTER, the
sound is at the center. The display indicates
the selected position.
• Even at the same numerical value, the stereo
balance may differ slightly depending on the
sound.
KEY SHIFT:
Use the KEY ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
amount of key shift (−24 to +24).
• A value of 1 means a shift of one semi-tone.
To raise (or lower) the pitch one octave, set
the value to +12 (or −12).
• The ∨ button is used to lower the pitch, and
the ∧ button to raise the pitch.
TUNING:
Use the TUNE ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the fine
tuning (−128 to +127).
• The ∨ button is used to lower the pitch, and
the ∧ button to raise the pitch.
SUSTAIN:
Use the SUSTAIN ON/OFF buttons to enable or
disable the SUSTAIN function.
Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the length of
the sustain.
147
QQTG0692
Sound
settings for one part, select another part and
repeat the adjustment procedure as desired.
13_Part VIII.fm
148 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時51分
Part VIII
Sound
<PAGE 2>
REVERB:
Use the REVERB ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the
depth of the REVERB (0 to 127).
Sound
DIGITAL EFFECT:
Use the DIG. EFFECT ON/OFF buttons to set
the DIGITAL EFFECT to on or off.
CHORUS:
Use the CHORUS ON/OFF button to set the
CHORUS to on or off. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons
to adjust the depth of the effect (0 to 127).
MULTI:
Use the MULTI ON/OFF button to set the MULTI
EFFECT to on or off. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to
adjust the depth of the effect (0 to 127).
<PAGE 3>
EQ LOW:
Use the EQ LOW FC, GAIN ∧ and ∨ buttons to
adjust the sound quality in the lower range.
EQ HIGH:
Use the EQ HIGH FC, GAIN ∧ and ∨ buttons to
adjust the sound quality in the upper range.
GLIDE PEDAL:
Use the GLIDE ON/OFF buttons to enable or disable the glide effect, if it has been assigned to
the Foot Switch (sold separately).
• For Foot Switch settings, refer to page 172.
SUSTAIN PEDAL:
Use the SUST ON/OFF buttons to enable or disable the sustain effect, if it has been assigned to
the Foot Switch (sold separately).
148
QQTG0692
PART EXP PEDAL:
Use the EXP PDL ON/OFF buttons to enable or
disable part expression by the expression pedal
(sold separately).
• To enable the ON/OFF setting for each part, it
is necessary to set EXPRESS. PEDAL to
PART EXPRESSION on the FOOT CONTROLLERS display. (Refer to page 173.)
ORIGINAL TUNING:
Use the ORIG ON/OFF button to enable or disable the tuning for each sound.
• For details about ORIGINAL TUNING, refer to
page 152.
13_Part VIII.fm
149 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時51分
Part VIII
Sound
FILTER RESONANCE:
Use the RESO ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the
amount of resonance (0 to 127).
VIBRATO RATE:
Use the RATE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
vibrato speed (0 to 127).
ATTACK TIME:
Use the ATT ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
attack time (0 to 127).
VIBRATO DEPTH:
Use the DEP ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
vibrato depth (0 to 127).
DECAY TIME:
Use the DEC ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
decay time (0 to 127).
VIBRATO DELAY:
Use the DEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the time
interval from when the keys are played until the
vibrato starts (0 to 127).
RELEASE TIME:
Use the REL ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
release time (0 to 127).
• The center value is 64 (±0).
BRIGHTNESS:
Use the BRI ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the brightness of the sound (0 to 127).
<PAGE 5>
MONO/POLY MODE:
Use the MONO/POLY ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
the output mode.
PORTAMENTO:
Use the PORTAMENTO ON/OFF buttons to
enable or disable the portamento function. (Portamento is a continuous gliding movement from
one tone to another.)
Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the portamento time.
• PORTAMENTO does not function for the
POLY MODE.
MODULATION SENSITIVITY:
Use the MOD SENS ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust
the sensitivity of the MODULATION.
• Use the MSB ∧ and ∨ buttons (half-tone increments) and the LSB ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust
the setting.
BEND RANGE:
Use the BEND RANGE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the PITCH BEND range (0 to 12). Increments
are in semi-tones.
• The higher the number, the greater the
change in pitch when the PITCH BEND wheel
is operated.
149
QQTG0692
Sound
<PAGE 4>
13_Part VIII.fm
150 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時51分
Part VIII
Sound
Mixer
Use the MIXER display to visually adjust the major settings of each part. Use this display to make broad,
general changes to the settings.
1. On the SOUND MENU display, select MIXER.
• The MIXER display consists of 5 pages. Use
the PAGE buttons to switch among the pages.
• Each time the OTHER PARTS/TR button is
pressed, the part that is displayed changes.
MULTI DEPTH:
Select MULTI DEPTH. Use the buttons below
the display to adjust the depth of the MULTI
EFFECT for the corresponding part (0 to 127).
Sound
2. Adjust each parameter.
MULTI:
Select MULTI. Use the buttons below the display to set the MULTI EFFECT to ON or OFF
for each part.
SOUND:
Select SOUND. Use the buttons below the
display to set the sound for the corresponding
part.
• The buttons in the SOUND GROUP can also
be used to select the sound.
PAN:
Select PAN. Use the buttons below the display
to adjust the stereo balance of the corresponding part (L64–CTR–R63).
VOLUME:
Select VOLUME. Use the buttons below the
display to adjust the volume of the corresponding part (0 to 127).
• To mute a part, press both the corresponding
balance buttons as the same time. To cancel
the mute, press either balance button for the
part.
REVERB:
Select REVERB. Use the buttons below the
display to set the level of the REVERB for the
corresponding part (0 to 127).
150
QQTG0692
DIGITAL EFFECT:
Select DIGITAL EFF. Use the buttons below
the display to set the DIGITAL EFFECT to ON
or OFF for the corresponding part.
CHORUS:
Select CHORUS. Use the buttons below the
display to set the CHORUS to ON or OFF for
each part.
CHORUS DEPTH:
Select CHORUS DEPTH. Use the buttons
below the display to set the depth of the CHORUS for the corresponding part (0 to 127).
EQUALIZER HIGH:
Sound quality correction in the high range.
Select EQUALIZER HI FC; use the buttons
below the display to set the standard frequency. Select EQUALIZER HI GAIN; use the
buttons below the display to set the ratio of
change.
13_Part VIII.fm
151 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時51分
Part VIII
EQUALIZER LOW:
Sound quality correction in the low range.
Select EQUALIZER LOW FC; use the buttons
below the display to set the standard frequency. Select EQUALIZER LOW GAIN; use
the buttons below the display to set the ratio of
change.
Sound
VIBRATO RATE:
Select VIBRATO RATE. Use the buttons
below the display to adjust the vibrato speed
for each part (0 to 127).
VIBRATO DEPTH:
Select VIBRATO DEPTH. Use the buttons
below the display to adjust the vibrato depth
for each part (0 to 127).
KEY SHIFT:
Select KEY SHIFT. Use the buttons below the
display to adjust the shift width of the output
pitch of each part (in semitone increments;
–24 to +24).
MIDI CHANNEL:
Select MIDI CHANNEL. Use the balance buttons below the display to set the MIDI channel
for each part (CH1–CH16).
• Information about MIDI channels can be found
on page 190.
LOCAL CONTROL:
Select LOCAL CONTROL. Use the balance
buttons below the display to turn LOCAL
CONTROL ON or OFF for each part.
• Even at the same numerical value, the PAN
and effects may differ depending on the
sound.
• For some parts, such as the automatic accompaniment parts, the items that can be adjusted
are limited.
䡲 EDIT MIXER
If you press the EDIT MIXER button on the
PAGE 5/5 display, the display changes the setting display to modify the sounds.
FILTER RESONANCE:
Select FILTER RESONANCE. Use the buttons below the display to set the amount of
resonance applied to each part (0 to 127).
<PAGE 2>
BRIGHTNESS:
Select BRIGHTNESS. Use the buttons below
the display to set the amount of brightness
applied to each part (0 to 127).
ATTACK TIME:
Select ATTACK TIME. Use the buttons below
the display to set the sound attack time for
each part (0 to 127).
DECAY TIME:
Select DECAY TIME. Use the buttons below
the display to set the sound decay time for
each part (0 to 127).
RELEASE TIME:
Select RELEASE TIME. Use the buttons
below the display to set the release time for
each part (0 to 127).
<PAGE 1>
151
QQTG0692
Sound
VIBRATO DELAY:
Select VIBRATO DELAY. Use the buttons
below the display to specify the time interval
from when the keys are played until the vibrato
starts for each part (0 to 127).
13_Part VIII.fm
152 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時51分
Part VIII
Sound
Master Tuning
This setting is used to fine-tune the pitch of the entire instrument. This is convenient when the Keyboard is
played with other instruments or with a recorded performance.
1. On the SOUND MENU display, select
Sound
MASTER TUNING.
• The display changes to the following.
2. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the pitch.
Key Scaling
For each part you can change the tuning of each key within a one-octave range. In addition to equal temperament tuning, you can perform in other types of scales, for example Arabic tuning.
1. On the SOUND MENU display, select KEY
4. Use the TYPE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
SCALING.
• The display looks similar to the following.
type of tuning.
• Select from FLAT, WERCKMEISTER, KIRNBERGER, ARABIC 1 to 5, SLENDRO, and
PELOG.
5. Use the SHIFT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
key to perform in.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for each part, as necessary.
2. Press the OCTAVE TUNING TEMPLATE button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
7. Press the SET button.
• The OCTAVE TUNING for the specified type
and key is automatically set.
■ Settings for each key.
On the KEY SCALING display, you can adjust
the tuning for each key.
3. Use the PART ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
part to set.
• If ALL is selected, all the parts are set at once.
152
QQTG0692
After selecting a key with the KEY SELECT 䊴
and 䊳 buttons, the pitch can be adjusted using
the TUNING ∧ and ∨ buttons.
• The pitch can be raised or lowered by a maximum of one half-tone.
• You can use the PART SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to switch the part.
• Use the ALL PARTS INITIAL button to return
all parts to the flat tuning.
13_Part VIII.fm
153 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時51分
Part VIII
Sound
䡲 ORIGINAL tuning
Each instrument of each sound has its own original tuning data. This setting affects the tuning
curve that spans the entire keyboard. So, for
example, the acoustic piano-type sounds duplicate those of a real piano, in that the high notes
are tuned slightly higher and the low notes
slightly lower.
You can specify for each part whether this original tuning is enabled or not.
1. Use the PART SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to
select a part.
2. Use the ORIGINAL TUNING ON/OFF button
Sound
to select ON or OFF.
Sound Load Option
The data for each individual sound is set with the most suitable effect settings, etc., but in some cases
when switching from one sound to another and these settings are recalled, the setup is not the way you
want it. By using the SOUND LOAD OPTION, you can adjust the settings so that specific data is not
recalled.
1. On the SOUND MENU display, select SOUND
LOAD OPTION.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select an item.
Use the ∧ and ∨ button to set the filter to ON
or OFF.
153
QQTG0692
13_Part VIII.fm
154 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時51分
Part VIII
Sound
APC Reverb Setting
Although an appropriate REVERB is applied for the automatic accompaniment parts depending on the
rhythms by default, you can adjust the REVERB level for each part.
1. On the SOUND MENU display, select APC
Sound
REVERB SETTING.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the PART ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the
part, the DEPTH ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the
value (PRESET IN RHYTHM, 0 – 127).
• PRESET IN RHYTHM is an optimal preset
value for each rhythm for use with the APC
Reverb Setting.
154
QQTG0692
07_Part II.fm 49 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
Selecting rhythms
Many exciting rhythms are stored in the memory of this instrument. First select one of the rhythm groups
and then choose the desired rhythm.
Select a rhythm
1. In the RHYTHM GROUP section, select a
rhythm group.
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
䡲 VARIATION
There are four variations available for each
rhythm. Use the VARIATION buttons to select
the desired variation.
MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER
DANCE
CLUB
USA
TRAD &
WALTZ
1
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
VARIATION
2
3
4
MEMORY
LOAD
• MEMORY is the group in which you store the
rhythms you create with the COMPOSER.
(Refer to page 111.)
2. Select the desired rhythm from the list on the
display.
• Confirm that the MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
button is off. (If it is on, press it once to turn it
off.)
• The nuance of the pattern differs with each
variation number.
• You can change to a different variation while
the rhythm is playing.
• If there is more than one page to the display,
use the PAGE buttons to move from one
screen page to another.
49
QQTG0692
Playing the rhythm
SIMPLE
BEAT
07_Part II.fm 50 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
Start the rhythm
There are two ways to start the rhythm.
䡲 Normal start
䡲 Adjust the tempo
The tempo of the rhythm pattern is adjusted with
the TEMPO/PROGRAM buttons.
1. Select a rhythm.
2. Press the START/STOP button to turn it on.
TEMPO/
PROGRAM
START/STOP
1 2 3 4 BEAT
Playing the rhythm
• The selected rhythm pattern immediately
begins to play.
• You can stop the rhythm by pressing the
START/STOP button again to turn it off.
• The BEAT indicators above the START/STOP
button light to indicate the beat.
䡲 Synchronized start
With the synchronized start feature, the rhythm
pattern starts when you play a key on the keyboard.
1. Select a rhythm.
2. Press the SYNCHRO & BREAK button to turn
• The tempo is shown on the display as a
numerical value ( q = 40 to 300).
• When the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit,
the TEMPO/PROGRAM cannot be used to
adjust the tempo.
• To adjust the tempo during playback, refer to
page 81.
䡲 TAP TEMPO
You can set the tempo of the rhythm by tapping
this button few times with your finger at the
tempo you wish to play.
it on.
TAP TEMPO
SYNCHRO &
BREAK
3. Play a key to the left of the keyboard split
point.
• The rhythm pattern begins to play.
• You can use the synchronized start feature
even when the keyboard is not divided into left
and right sections. To start the rhythm, press a
key to the left of the specified split point.
50
QQTG0692
• The tempo at which the button is tapped is
detected, and the tempo automatically
changes correspondingly.
07_Part II.fm 51 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
Playing the rhythm
Intro, fill-in and ending patterns fitting each different rhythm pattern are permanently recorded in your
Keyboard, thus allowing a versatile rhythm performance.
INTRO
Begin the rhythm performance with an intro pattern.
1. Press the INTRO & ENDING 1 or INTRO &
䡲 Mode setting
You can select the mode for the count sound.
1. Press the MODE button in the AUTO PLAY
CHORD section to turn it on.
ENDING 2 button to turn it on.
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MODE
INTRO & ENDING
1
2
OFF/ON
CHORD FINDER
• The display looks similar to the following.
rhythm.
START/STOP
1 2 3 4 BEAT
2. Use the COUNT INTRO button to select a
• An intro pattern is played, after which the normal rhythm pattern begins.
mode.
VOICE: A spoken count (initialized setting).
CLICK: A clicking sound for the count.
COUNT INTRO
You can begin the rhythm performance with a
spoken one-measure count.
FILL IN
1. Press the COUNT INTRO (FILL IN 2) button
You can insert a fill-in pattern any time during the
rhythm performance. Choose from two different
fill-in patterns.
to turn it on.
1. Select a rhythm and press the START/STOP
FILL IN
2
COUNT
INTRO
2. Press the START/STOP button to start the
rhythm.
• A spoken one-measure count is played, after
which the normal rhythm pattern begins.
button.
2. Press the FILL IN 1 or FILL IN 2 button.
FILL IN
1
2
SEQUENCER
RESET
COUNT
INTRO
• A fill-in pattern is heard immediately for the
remainder of the measure.
• When a FILL IN button is pressed on the last
beat of the measure, the fill-in pattern continues to the end of the following measure.
51
QQTG0692
Playing the rhythm
2. Press the START/STOP button to start the
07_Part II.fm 52 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
ENDING
Finish the rhythm performance with an ending
pattern.
1. Select a rhythm and press the START/STOP
button.
2. Press the INTRO & ENDING 1 or INTRO &
ENDING 2 button to turn it on.
INTRO & ENDING
1
2
Playing the rhythm
• An ending pattern is produced, and then the
rhythm performance stops.
• If you accidentally press the INTRO & ENDING button in the middle of the tune, you can
press the FILL IN 1 or FILL IN 2 button. The
ending pattern stops, and a fill-in pattern is
produced, after which the normal rhythm performance continues.
Auto Play Chord
Simply by playing a chord on the keyboard, the AUTO PLAY CHORD function automatically plays an
accompaniment pattern which matches perfectly the selected rhythm. With a real accompaniment as a
background, you can concentrate on playing the melody.
How the AUTO PLAY CHORD works
Chord
52
QQTG0692
Melody
When an AUTO PLAY CHORD mode is
selected, an automatic accompaniment which
matches the rhythm you have chosen is played
in the chord which you specify with your left
hand. The melody is played with your right hand.
• The accompaniment pattern of the AUTO
PLAY CHORD is composed of 8 parts:
DRUMS 1, 2, BASS, ACCOMP 1–5.
• The volume of each part can be adjusted with
the buttons below the display. (Refer to page
30.)
07_Part II.fm 53 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
Playing chords
Choose from the 4 ways of playing chords.
䡲 BASIC mode
This mode lets beginners specify chords with just
one finger. With this mode, chords can be specified either with one finger <one finger> or by
pressing all of the chord's sound components
<fingered>.
<one finger>
In the <one-finger>, a major chord can be played
just by pressing the key for its root note.
Example: C chord
minor chord
seventh chord
minor seventh chord
Play the root note plus a
black key to the left of it.
Play the root note plus a
white key to the left of it.
Play the root note plus a
black key and a white key to
the left of it.
Example: Cm
Example: C7
Example: Cm7
• When three or more keys of a chord are pressed, it is recognized as a <fingered> chord.
<fingered>
In the <fingered>, you specify the chord by playing all the notes in the chord.
• Play at least three notes to specify the chord.
䡲 ADVANCED 1 mode
This mode accepts chords specified with <fingered> and disregards all unrecognizable chord
specifications.
• It recognizes many more chords than the
BASIC mode’s <fingered> chords.
䡲 ADVANCED 2 mode
This mode accepts chords specified with <fingered> and, for unrecognizable chords, it plays
the auto accompaniment according to the keys
pressed.
• It recognizes many more chords than the
BASIC mode’s <fingered> chords.
䡲 PIANIST mode
In the PIANIST mode, the entire keyboard can
be used to specify chords <fingered>
(ADVANCE) for the automatic accompaniment; a
RIGHT part is assigned to all the keys, and the
keyboard does not split.
• When specifying chords, if you press a key a
perfect 5th or more below the lowest note of
the chord, the BASS part becomes a pattern
based on that note.
<APC HOLD>
If this function is assigned to the Foot Switch
(sold separately), for example, pressing the Foot
Switch will play the currently specified chord in
that timing, allowing you to focus your performance on a solo melody.
• The accompaniment continues in the same
chord as long as the Foot Switch is
depressed, and it does not change even if
other chords are played.
• To change the Foot Switch assignment, refer
to page 172.
53
QQTG0692
Playing the rhythm
Minor, seventh and minor seventh chords are also easily produced.
07_Part II.fm 54 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
How to use the AUTO PLAY CHORD
1. Select the desired rhythm and sound(s), and
• When you use FILL IN, INTRO and ENDING,
the automatic accompaniment is also used in
these patterns.
• You can set the mode which determines how
the LEFT part sounds during an AUTO PLAY
CHORD performance. (Refer to the next
page.)
• In the initialized condition, when the rhythm is
off, if an AUTO PLAY CHORD mode is on and
a chord is specified, the specified root note (R.
BASS part) and chord notes (CHORD part)
are produced. The volumes of these notes can
be adjusted. (Refer to page 30.)
set the tempo.
2. Press the AUTO PLAY CHORD’s OFF/ON
button to turn it on.
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MODE
OFF/ON
CHORD FINDER
3. Press the AUTO PLAY CHORD’s MODE but7. To stop the automatic accompaniment, press
Playing the rhythm
ton to turn it on.
• The display looks similar to the following.
the START/STOP button.
• If you wish the automatic accompaniment to
begin and end the performance, set the
OFF/ON button to off.
䡲 MEMORY
Press the MEMORY button and select either one
of the following:
ON:
Even when removing your finger from
the keys, the present chord is retained
until the next chord is specified.
OFF: When removing your finger, the chord
is deleted.
AUTO: The chord is retained when auto
accompaniment is playing but is not
retained when stopped.
4. Select an AUTO PLAY CHORD mode .
• After a few seconds, the display returns to the
previous display.
• If the BASIC or ADVANCED mode was
selected, the keyboard automatically splits
into right and left sections.
5. Press the START/STOP button to begin the
䡲 ON BASS
If the ON BASS button is ON, the BASS part is
produced in the key of the lowest note of the
played chord, thus making it possible to play
chords such as C on G.
• For example, with the ON BASS button on, if
you play a C chord by pressing the keys G, C
and E, the BASS part is produced in the key of
G.
rhythm.
• You can start the rhythm by playing a key on
the keyboard. (Refer to page 50.)
6. Specify a chord.
• If the BASIC or ADVANCED mode was
selected, specify the chord on the keyboard
section to the left of the split point.
• An accompaniment pattern in the specified
chord is automatically played. Play the melody
with your right hand.
Example of how to play a BASIC <One-Finger> accompaniment
Play the melody with
your right hand.
Left hand
54
QQTG0692
C
F
G
C
07_Part II.fm 55 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
Left Hold
CHORD FINDER
This setting determines how the LEFT part
sounds when the LEFT button in the CONDUCTOR is on during a performance with the BASIC
or ADVANCED mode.
The CHORD FINDER can help, for example,
when you do not know which keys to press to
specify a given chord. When you input the chord
name, the CHORD FINDER shows you which
keys to press and even lets you hear the notes
that make up.
1. Press the MODE button to turn it on.
• The display changes to the following.
1. Press the AUTO PLAY CHORD’s MODE button to turn it on.
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MODE
OFF/ON
CHORD FINDER
2. Use the LEFT HOLD: ON/OFF button to set
the mode to on or off.
• The display changes to the following.
ON:
Specifying <one-finger> chords in the BASIC
mode produces the full chords; otherwise the
LEFT part notes are those of the pressed
chord keys.
• When BASIC is selected the LEFT part turns
off, but it will sound if you turn it on.
• Touch response does not function for the
LEFT part.
• When the mode is set to ON, during a rhythm
performance, the LEFT part continues to play
even when the keys are released.
Playing the rhythm
OFF:
The LEFT part sounds from the pressed chord
keys.
• When BASIC is selected, the LEFT part turns
off. The LEFT part sounds if you turn it on, but
<one-finger> chords cannot be specified.
2. Select CHORD FINDER.
• The display changes to the following.
3. Use the APC MODE button to select the automatic accompaniment mode you will use to
specify chords (BASIC, ADVANCED 1).
• In the list column are shown the chords which
can be specified in each mode.
(Continued on the next page)
55
QQTG0692
07_Part II.fm 56 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分
Part II
4. Use the ROOT buttons to select the root note
of the chord. Use the TYPE buttons to select
the type of chord.
• A typical way to finger the specified chord
(TYPICAL) is illustrated on a keyboard diagram.
• Each time the INVERSION button is pressed,
different INVERSION fingerings are illustrated
in order. (If there is no INVERSION fingering
for the specified chord, this button is not
shown on the display.)
• When the button with a picture of an ear is
pressed, the notes of the chord sound. (The
octave of the illustrated keys and that of the
played tones may differ.)
Playing the rhythm
BREAK function
With the break function, the rhythm starts when
the left keyboard is played and stops when the
fingers are removed from the keys.
1. Select an AUTO PLAY CHORD mode.
• At this time, the MEMORY (APC SELECT)
button should be OFF.
2. Press the SYNCHRO & BREAK button to turn
it on.
SYNCHRO &
BREAK
5. To exit the CHORD FINDER procedure, press
the EXIT button.
3. Specify a chord.
Playing the rhythm
• The automatic accompaniment begins to play
(synchronized start).
• For the PIANIST mode, play the keys to the
left of the currently set split point.
4. Release the chord keys.
• The automatic accompaniment stops. When
the keys are pressed again, the rhythm starts
from the first beat.
56
QQTG0692
07_Part II.fm 57 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
Fade In/Fade Out
Add interest to your performance by starting a part with a fade-in or ending it with a fade-out.
• KN2600: does not work for the SD-AUDIO data playback.
FADE IN
FADE OUT
At the beginning of the song, the volume of each
part rises slowly.
At the end of the song, the volume of each part
gradually fades to nothing.
1. Set up the panel settings for your perform-
1. Start the performance.
ance.
2. Turn on the FADE OUT button at the point you
IN
FADE
OUT
• The indicator flashes. In this condition, the volumes for all parts change to 0 and no sound is
produced from this instrument until the FADE
IN is turned off or until step 3 is executed.
3. Play the keyboard or press the START/STOP
want the fade-out to start.
IN
FADE
OUT
• The volumes of all the parts slowly fade to 0.
• The indicator flashes to show that fade-out is
completed, and then goes out. The volumes
for all parts return to their specified settings.
• If you wish to interrupt the fade-out, press the
FADE OUT button to turn it off.
button.
• The volume slowly builds to its preset level.
• For the fade-in effect for a rhythm part or when
playing back a SEQUENCER performance,
turn on the FADE IN button before pressing
the START/STOP button.
• At the end of the fade-in, the FADE IN indicator goes out.
• During the fade-in, FADE IN is shown in the
upper right part of the normal display.
57
QQTG0692
Playing the rhythm
2. Turn on the FADE IN button.
07_Part II.fm 58 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
FADE SET
Adjust the settings for the FADE IN and FADE
OUT.
1. Press and hold the FADE IN or FADE OUT
button for a few seconds.
IN
FADE
OUT
Playing the rhythm
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the item.
Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the setting.
FADE IN
Time:
Specify the time elapsed between 0 volume
to the set volume (1 measure to 16 measure).
FADE OUT
Time:
Specify the time elapsed between the set
volume and 0 volume (1 measure to 16
measure).
Auto Reset:
Specify whether the volume of each part
automatically returns to its specified setting
(ON, OFF).
Rhythm Auto stop:
Specify whether the rhythm turns off after
fade-out is completed (ON, OFF).
SEQ Auto stop:
Specify whether the SEQUENCER playback automatically stops after fade-out is
completed (ON, OFF).
• The display returns to the previous display a
few seconds after you have changed the settings.
• You can also access this display from the
CONTROL MENU display. (Refer to page
171.)
58
QQTG0692
07_Part II.fm 59 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
Sound Arranger
The SOUND ARRANGER feature lets you select other sounds for the AUTO PLAY CHORD parts of
each rhythm.
1. Select the rhythm whose sound you wish to
change.
• Do not select the MEMORY button.
2. In the SOUND ARRANGER, press the SET
button to turn it on.
Playing back the sounds
1. In the SOUND ARRANGER, press the
OFF/ON button to turn it on.
SOUND ARRANGER
SET
OFF/ON
SOUND ARRANGER
SET
OFF/ON
• The display looks similar to the following.
• When the OFF/ON button is off, the factorypreset sounds are produced.
• This setting can be set separately for each
rhythm.
• If you wish to modify the settings you specified, while the OFF/ON button is on, press the
SET button to turn it on.
3. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the part
whose sound you wish to change.
4. Select the desired sound.
• The DIGITAL EFFECT on/off status can also
be specified (except for DRUMS part).
• For the DRUMS part, select sounds from the
DRUM KITS group.
• The sound and on/off status of the DIGITAL
EFFECT are shown on the display.
• The sounds marked with # cannot be
changed.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the other parts as
desired.
6. When you have finished selecting the sounds,
press the SET button to turn it off.
59
QQTG0692
Playing the rhythm
2. Start the rhythm (automatic accompaniment).
07_Part II.fm 60 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
One Touch Play
ONE TOUCH PLAY automatically sets a suggested combination of sounds and an appropriate tempo for
your chosen rhythm style.
1. Select a rhythm pattern.
3. Play the keyboard.
• Do not select the MEMORY button.
• When you specify a chord, the automatic
rhythm begins to play immediately.
2. Press and hold the ONE TOUCH PLAY button
for a few seconds.
Playing the rhythm
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
• During setting, the style name is shown on the
display.
• The AUTO PLAY CHORD and the SYNCHRO
& BREAK are automatically turned on, and
the sounds and effects, volume balances,
tempo etc. that are ideal for your selected
rhythm are automatically set.
Music Stylist
MUSIC STYLIST sets up your instrument with a suitable registration for a specific style of music or tune.
Setup by music style
Select a style from the MUSICAL CATEGORY.
1. Press the MUSIC STYLIST button to turn it
on.
2. Select MUSICAL CATEGORY.
• The display looks similar to the following.
MUSIC STYLIST
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Use the CATEGORY ▲ and ▼ buttons to
select a category.
4. Use the STYLE ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a
music style.
• During the search, you can use the SKIP ∧
and ∨ buttons to skip to the previous or following subcategory.
60
QQTG0692
07_Part II.fm 61 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
• The AUTO PLAY CHORD and the SYNCHRO
& BREAK turn on, and the sounds, effects,
volume balances, rhythm and tempo etc.
which are best suited for the selected music
style are automatically selected.
5. Play the keyboard.
• When you specify a chord, the automatic
rhythm begins to play immediately.
Setup by era
You can select a style from a specific music era.
1. Press the MUSIC STYLIST button to turn it
on.
2. Select MUSICAL ERA.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• The AUTO PLAY CHORD and the SYNCHRO
& BREAK turn on, and the sounds, effects,
volume balances, rhythm and tempo etc.
which are best suited for the selected style are
automatically selected.
4. Play the keyboard.
Playing the rhythm
• When you specify a chord, the automatic
rhythm begins to play immediately.
3. Use the STYLE ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a
style.
• You can use the SKIP ∧ and ∨ buttons to skip
to the previous or following era.
• You can use the MORE button to view the
next page of styles.
Setup by alphabetical order
You can use alphabetical or numerical search to
select a style name.
1. Press the MUSIC STYLIST button to turn it
on.
2. Select ALPHABETICAL LIST.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• You can use the SKIP ∧ and ∨ buttons to skip
to the previous or following alphabetical or
numerical heading.
• You can use the MORE button to view the
next page of styles.
• The AUTO PLAY CHORD and the SYNCHRO
& BREAK turn on, and the sounds, effects,
volume balances, rhythm and tempo etc.
which are best suited for the selected style are
automatically selected.
4. Play the keyboard.
3. Use the STYLE ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a
• When you specify a chord, the automatic
rhythm begins to play immediately.
style.
61
QQTG0692
07_Part II.fm 62 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
• On the MUSICAL CATEGORY, MUSICAL
ERA, or ALPHABETICAL LIST (ALPHABET) display, you can move freely to each
display using the buttons to the right of the
display.
• After deciding on a style with the MUSIC
STYLIST, if you record the settings in the
PANEL MEMORY, the same style name is
copied to the PANEL MEMORY (up to 16
characters). When you recall the PANEL
MEMORY settings, this style name is
shown at the top of the normal display.
• After selecting a style, turn the MUSIC
STYLIST button off if you wish to have the
normal display active during a performance.
Playing the rhythm
Music Style Arranger
The MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER helps you to make professional registration changes during your performance. Select between four contrasting registrations at the push of a button, or let your instrument
change the registration automatically for you when you use FILL IN 1 or 2. The MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER will also alter the accompaniment in character with the registration change creating a polished sounding arrangement.
How to use the MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
1. Select a rhythm pattern.
2. Press the MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER button
to turn it on.
MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER
3. Use the VARIATION buttons to select a style
(1 to 4).
MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER
1
62
QQTG0692
VARIATION
2
3
4
• The nuance of the pattern differs with each
number.
• The panel settings (including the tempo)
change according to the selected rhythm and
music style. The AUTO PLAY CHORD, the
MEMORY button and the SYNCHRO &
BREAK button are automatically turned on.
When a key on the left section of the keyboard
is pressed, the automatic rhythm begins to
play immediately.
• During your performance, the style can be
changed, but the tempo does not change.
07_Part II.fm 63 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
How to change the music style
during your performance
While you are playing the keyboard with the
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER on, press the FILL
IN 1 or FILL IN 2 button.
FILL IN
1
2
SEQUENCER
RESET
COUNT
INTRO
• Each time the FILL IN 1 button is pressed, the
FILL IN 1 pattern plays, and then the music
style changes in the 4 ➝ 3 ➝ 2 ➝ 1 order. And
each time the FILL IN 2 button is pressed, the
FILL IN 2 pattern plays, and then the style
changes in the 1 ➝ 2 ➝ 3 ➝ 4 order.
1. Press and hold the MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER button for a few seconds.
• The display changes to the following.
Playing the rhythm
䡲 MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER mode
You can define which panel settings change by
pressing a FILL IN button when the MUSIC
STYLE ARRANGER is used.
2. Select the mode.
RHYTHM:
Only the rhythm changes.
SOUND & RHYTHM:
The sound, effects, rhythms, etc. change.
PANEL MEMORY:
The PANEL MEMORY number (BANK A: 1 to
4) changes. You can store your desired panel
settings in the PANEL MEMORY beforehand
and switch from one to another quickly.
• After a few seconds, the display exits the setting mode.
• You can also access this setting display from
the CONTROL MENU display. (Refer to page
171.)
63
QQTG0692
07_Part II.fm 64 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
Panel Memory
PANEL MEMORY stores all the current panel settings so you can recall them at the push of a button.
How to store the panel settings
By storing all the panel settings you use for a
song in the same bank, for example, you can
switch from one panel setup to the next in a
flash.
䡲 BANK VIEW
After selecting a bank, you can use the PAGE
buttons to go to the PAGE 2/2 page and confirm
the memory names of that bank’s 8 memories.
1. Set up the desired panel settings (sounds, volumes, etc.)
2. Press the BANK VIEW button to turn it on.
Playing the rhythm
BANK VIEW
• You can use the BANK ∧ and ∨ buttons to
view other banks.
• You can also access this display by pressing
and holding any of the PANEL MEMORY
number buttons (1 to 8) for a few seconds.
• The BANK SELECT display appears.
3. Select the desired bank (A, B, C).
4. With the SET button held down, press one of
the numbered buttons
MEMORY (1 to 8).
1
2
5
6
of
PANEL MEMORY
3
4
the
PANEL
SET
BANK VIEW
7
8
NEXT BANK
• The panel settings are now stored in the specified bank and number.
64
QQTG0692
07_Part II.fm 65 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
Assign a name to the bank/memory
Recall the panel setup
You can assign names to the banks and memories.
1. Press the BANK VIEW button to turn it on.
1. Select a bank or memory.
2. Press the desired PANEL MEMORY number
page on the display.
3. Press the BANK NAMING button to assign a
name to the bank, or the MEMORY NAMING
button for the memory.
• The display looks similar to the following.
button (1 to 8).
• The panel setup changes to the one stored in
the specified memory.
• You can then change the sound settings, etc.
manually; however, the contents of the memory remain unchanged until you store them
again.
• The “Control Preset” bank of the PERFORMANCE PADS or the Foot Switch (sold separately) can also be used to change from one
PANEL MEMORY setup to another. (Refer to
pages 64, 172.)
• The currently selected bank, memory number
and memory name are shown in the top line
on the normal display.
䡲 NEXT BANK
You can press the NEXT BANK button to switch
to the next bank. This allows you to change
banks without exiting the normal display.
4. Use the buttons below the display to assign a
•
•
•
•
•
•
name.
Set the character input position with the POSITION buttons, select the characters with the
alphanumeric buttons and repeat name
assignment.
Switch from upper to lower case letters with
the ABC, abc button.
Press the INS button to enter a space at the
cursor position.
Press the DEL button to erase the character at
the cursor position.
Press the CLR button to erase the entire
name.
Press the →← button to center the name.
NEXT BANK
• Each time the NEXT BANK button is pressed,
the bank indication changes in order (A ➝ B
➝ C ➝ A ➝ B ...).
• The panel settings change when a PANEL
MEMORY number button (1 to 8) is pressed.
5. When you have finished assigning the name,
press the OK button.
65
QQTG0692
Playing the rhythm
2. Use the PAGE buttons to go to the PAGE 2/2
Select a bank.
07_Part II.fm 66 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時40分
Part II
PANEL MEMORY mode
You can define which panel settings are recalled
when the PANEL MEMORY is used.
1. Press and hold the SET button for a few seconds.
• The display changes to the following.
2. Select the mode.
Playing the rhythm
NORMAL:
The sounds and volume balance, and CONDUCTOR status are stored.
EXPAND:
All the instrument’s settings are stored, including the rhythm (except for SOUND ARRANGER on/off status), TRANSPOSE,
tempo, etc.
• After a few seconds, the display exits the setting mode.
䡲 EXPAND MODE FILTER
You can specify which data is stored in the
EXPAND mode.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to access the PAGE
2/3–3/3 EXPAND MODE FILTER display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the item.
3. Use the ON and OFF buttons to store the on
or off status for the selected item.
66
QQTG0692
Playing the rhythm
08_Part III.fm 67 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時31分
Part III Performance Pads
Playing phrases
During your performance, you can insert a short recorded phrase or effect sounds by pressing a pad button. A different group of phrases is recorded in each bank.
1. Press the BANK button.
BANK
• When using the “Control Preset” bank, set the
AUTO SETTING button to OFF. When using
the PANEL MEMORY, turn off the PERFORM. PADS BANK of the EXPAND MODE
FILTER.
3. Press a pad button (1 to 6).
• The list of banks consists of three screen
pages. Use the PAGE buttons to change the
page.
1
PERFORMANCE PADS
2
4
6
5
• “User Bank” A, B and C are for storing your
original phrases.
• “Compile Bank” 1 and 2 are for assigning
phrases as you desire.
• Various functions are assigned to each pad
button in “Control Preset”.
1: ROTARY SLOW/FAST
2: PANEL MEMORY BANK INCREMENT
3: GLIDE
4: PANEL MEMORY DECREMENT
5: PANEL MEMORY BANK DECREMENT
6: PANEL MEMORY INCREMENT
3
SOLO
• A different phrase is assigned to each pad button.
• Information about the phrase, such as its
name and the measure number, is shown in
the normal display.
• The volume can be set with the buttons below
the normal display (PADS).
• The selected phrase is played in the current
tempo.
• To stop the phrase before it has ended, press
the STOP button.
• Some phrases continue to play until the STOP
button is pressed (the [Loop] indication
appears).
• During a rhythm performance, some phrases
may play in time with the measure count.
• When the automatic accompaniment is on,
several phrases are played in the specified
chord.
SOLO
Pad buttons 5 and 6 (SOLO) are phrases with
chord progressions. Just by pressing one of
these pad buttons, the phrase changes following
a chord progression that is typical for the music
genre of that bank.
• Use with the automatic accompaniment during your performance.
• Pad button 5 accesses a major chord progression, and pad button 6 a minor chord progression.
67
QQTG0692
Performance Pads
2. Select the desired bank from the display.
08_Part III.fm 68 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時31分
Part III
Peformance Pads
AUTO SETTING
When this button is set to on, the bank automatically changes according to the automatic setting
functions in the ONE TOUCH PLAY, the MUSIC
STYLE ARRANGER and the MUSIC STYLIST.
When it is set to off, the bank does not automatically change according to these functions.
AUTO SETTING
Copying phrases
You can copy the desired data, as phrases, from the SEQUENCER to each pad memory of a “User
Bank”.
• Chord data also can be copied to pad buttons 5 and 6 (SOLO).
PHRASE COPY
Copy a phrase from one pad to another.
3. Select PHRASE COPY.
• The display looks similar to the following.
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
on.
Performance Pads
PROGRAM
MENUS
4. Select the pad you wish to copy from.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• Use the buttons on the FROM side to set the
desired settings.
BANK:
Bank name
PAD:
Pad number (1 to 6)
5. Select the pad you wish to copy to.
2. Select PERFORMANCE PADS.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• Use the buttons on the TO side to set the
desired settings.
USER BANK: Bank name (USER A, B, C)
PAD:
Pad number (1 to 6)
• Only a SOLO phrase can be copied to the
SOLO pads (5 and 6).
6. Press the OK button.
7. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
off.
• If you wish to modify a portion of the copied
phrase, press the EDIT button to change to
the recording display.
68
QQTG0692
08_Part III.fm 69 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時31分
Part III
Peformance Pads
SEQ TO PAD COPY
1. Record a phrase in the SEQUENCER, or load
6. Select the pad button you wish to copy to.
data from a disk.
• After this procedure, please do not change the
song number.
• For details about SEQUENCER operation,
refer to page 73.
• For information about loading data, refer to
pages 120, 133.
• On the PERFORMANCE PAD side, use the
buttons to make the corresponding settings.
2. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
on.
3. Select PERFORMANCE PADS.
4. Select SEQ TO PAD COPY.
• The display looks similar to the following.
USER BANK:
The name of the bank (A/B/C).
PAD:
Pad button number (1 to 6).
PART:
The part to copy to.
TRACK:
The track number to copy from.
7. Press the OK button.
• A confirmation display appears. Press the
YES button if you wish to copy the phrase, or
press the NO button to cancel the procedure.
8. When you have completed the procedure,
press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
off.
5. Select the measures of SEQUENCER data
you wish to copy from.
• On the SEQUENCER side, use the buttons to
make the corresponding settings.
Performance Pads
FIRST MEASURE:
The first measure of the phrase you wish to
copy.
LAST MEASURE:
The last measure of the phrase you wish to
copy.
TRANSPOSE:
The setting to transpose the chords when
they are copied.
• The maximum that can be copied is 16 measures.
• When copying to pad button 5 or 6, the chord
(STEP) track is automatically displayed, and
the chord data is also copied. However, when
chord data from step record input does not
exist, the measures are blank.
• If you wish to convert the chords during playback, set TRANSPOSE to the key of C and
then copy the phrase.
69
QQTG0692
08_Part III.fm 70 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時31分
Part III
Peformance Pads
Compile
You can assign desired phrases from different banks in “Compile Bank” 1 and 2.
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
on.
PROGRAM
MENUS
6. Use the BANK and PHRASE ∧ and ∨ buttons
to select the desired bank and phrase you
wish to assign.
• The “Control” bank cannot be selected.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to assign phrases to the
other pad buttons.
8. When you have finished assigning the
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Select PERFORMANCE PADS.
Performance Pads
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Select COMPILE SET.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• You can press the NAMING button and assign
a name to the bank.
4. Press the BANK button to select a bank (Compile Bank: 1/2).
5. Use the PADS ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the
pad to which to assign the phrase.
70
QQTG0692
phrases, turn off the PROGRAM MENUS button.
08_Part III.fm 71 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時31分
Part III
Peformance Pads
Record a phrase
“User Bank” A, B and C are reserved for storing your original phrases.
• You can also copy phrases which are recorded in the SEQUENCER.
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
6. Press the OK button.
on.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• For details about KEY SETTING, refer to page
111.
• For details about CHORD MODIFY CHANGE,
refer to page 109.
7. Select the part to record to.
• Press the button for PART 1 or PART 2.
• Two parts can be recorded (PAD 1–4).
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Select PERFORMANCE PADS.
• The display looks similar to the following.
8. Proceed to record.
select a RECORDING BANK.
• The display changes to the RECORD PAD
display.
• You can press the BANK NAMING button and
assign a name to the bank.
• If the BANK CLR button is pressed, all the
data in the bank is cleared (a confirmation display appears).
Performance Pads
3. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
• The recording procedure is the same as for
the COMPOSER. (Refer to page 104.)
• In the PLAY SETTING, if LOOP is set to OFF,
LOOP recording is not possible.
4. Use the buttons below the display to select the
pad number to record.
• The display changes to the PAD RECORDING display.
• You can press the PAD NAMING button and
assign a name to the bank.
• To clear all the current data in the selected
pad, press the CLEAR THE PAD button, and
then press the YES button on the confirmation
display.
5. Use the MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons specify the
number of measures in the phrase. Use the
TIME SIGNATURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify
the time signature of the phrase.
71
QQTG0692
08_Part III.fm 72 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時31分
Part III
Peformance Pads
PLAY SETTING
CHORD STEP RECORD
Select a playback mode.
A chord progression can be stored in PAD 5 and
PAD 6.
1. On the PAD RECORDING display, press the
PLAY SETTING button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the START ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a
playback mode.
SYNCHRO:
During a rhythm performance, the phrase
playback begins in time with the measure.
INSTANT:
The phrase starts to play immediately when
the pad button is pressed, regardless of the
rhythm.
Performance Pads
3. Use the LOOP ∧ and ∨ buttons to enable or
disable loop playback.
ON:
Once the pad button is pressed, the phrase
is played back repeatedly until the STOP
button is pressed.
OFF:
The phrase is played back only once.
72
QQTG0692
1. On the REALTIME RECORDING display,
press the CHORD STEP RECORD button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the CURSOR buttons to move the cursor to the position you wish to input.
• The cursor moves in 1/8-note increments.
3. Input the chord by playing it on the keyboard.
• The chord name is shown.
4. Press the OK button.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to store the rest of the
chord progression.
• To delete a chord which has been input, move
the cursor to the specific chord and press the
ERS button.
09_Part IV.fm 73 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV Sequencer
Outline of the Sequencer
A sequencer records your performance in a similar way to a tape recorder. This instrument’s
SEQUENCER allows you to record up to 10 performances in a variety of ways. You may want to record
your entire performance in one go (especially if you are using AUTO PLAY CHORD to provide the
accompaniment), or to build up a complex arrangement with several different parts playing together, like
an orchestral score. This instrument’s SEQUENCER has 16 tracks. This means that you can record 16
different parts. However, you don’t have to use all 16 tracks. For some uses you may only need to use
one or two tracks. This instrument’s SEQUENCER enables you to edit your recorded performance. Unlike
a tape recorder you can change the sound or the tempo during playback, or correct wrong notes or timing
errors.
SEQUENCER features
Popular features
You can change the tempo without
Simplified recording method
EASY RECORD is a feature that allows you to
bypass the more complex recording procedures
so you can record and play back your performance quickly and easily.
• You can also record an accompaniment from
the AUTO PLAY CHORD.
Consistent sound
Your performance is reproduced by a sound
module as it reads digital data. So, unlike a
recorded tape, the sound never deteriorates no
matter how many times you play back your performance.
Edit your recorded performance
Comprehensive editing functions allow you to
modify your recorded performance. Data can
easily be erased, corrected or copied, providing
an especially convenient tool for creating your
original tunes.
Instant search
A recorded tape has to be rewound, but digital
action means you can return to the beginning of
your performance, or find any measure, instantly.
Create a one-man ensemble
Use the REALTIME RECORD function to record
your performance in up to 16 tracks and create
your own orchestra or band.
Store individual data to create your song
For repeating patterns or those especially complicated phrases, the STEP RECORD feature is
convenient for recording the notes one-by-one.
• This method can be used to store both the
chord progression for the automatic accompaniment and the rhythm changes.
Memory capacity
Up to 10 songs can be stored in the
SEQUENCER. Expressed in terms of notes, the
total number of notes which can be stored in all
the SEQUENCER songs and tracks is about
40,000. The remaining memory available for
recording is shown on the display as a percentage (MEMORY= %).
• When “Memory full!” appears on the display,
no more data can be stored in the
SEQUENCER.
73
QQTG0692
Sequencer
changing the pitch
When you record your performance at a slow
tempo and play it back at a faster tempo, the
pitch stays the same.
09_Part IV.fm 74 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
SEQUENCER menu
<RECORD & EDIT>
The configuration of the SEQUENCER setting
display is as follows.
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
on.
PROGRAM
MENUS
<COPY & PASTE>
• The display looks similar to the following.
<RANGE EDIT>
2. Select SEQUENCER.
Sequencer
• The display looks similar to the following.
(KN2600)
• The SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons are used to select
a song.
• You can press the NAMING button and assign
a name to the song. (Refer to page 83.)
• You can press the PANEL WRITE button to
store the current settings of the instrument at
the beginning of the song. (Refer to page 83.)
• KN2600: Pressing the SD AUDIO SYNCHRO
button will set the synchronization of the
SEQUENCER playback and the sound data
stored in the SD card. (Refer to page 103.)
3. Select RECORD & EDIT, COPY & PASTE or
RANGE SET, and follow the corresponding
procedure.
74
QQTG0692
09_Part IV.fm 75 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
Summary of the SEQUENCER menu items
REALTIME RECORD (page 78)
Record each part of your performance just
as you play it on the keyboard.
PUNCH RECORD (page 84)
Correct a selected portion of your recorded
performance.
STEP RECORD (page 86)
Store the sounds note-by-note on the display.
• You can also store the chord or rhythm progression for the AUTO PLAY CHORD.
TRACK ASSIGN (page 91)
Assign parts to tracks.
QUANTIZE (page 92)
Correct the timing of your performance.
SONG SELECT (page 84)
Select a song.
SONG CLEAR (page 93)
Erase all the recorded data of a song.
TRACK CLEAR (page 93)
Erase the contents of a specific track.
NOTE EDIT (page 94)
Store and correct performance (NOTE)
data on a piano roll display.
DRUM EDIT (page 95)
Store and correct DRUMS part data on a
special display.
COPY & PASTE
Copy recording data and paste it to the
desired location.
TRACK COPY (page 97)
Copy data of specific tracks.
SONG COPY (page 97)
Copy data of specific songs.
TRACK MERGE (page 98)
Merge the recorded contents of two tracks
and store in a third track.
TRACK CLEAR (page 97)
Erase the contents of a specific track.
SONG CLEAR (page 97)
Erase all the recorded data of a song.
MEASURE COPY (page 98)
Copy the contents of specific measures.
MEASURE ERASE (page 99)
Erase the contents of specific measures.
MEASURE DELETE (page 99)
Delete specific measures from the performance.
MEASURE INSERT (page 100)
Insert additional measures in the performance.
APC TO SMF CONVERT (page 100)
Save automatic accompaniment patterns
and pad performance data in a Standard
MIDI File (SMF).
RANGE EDIT
Change the note position etc. in the recorded
data.
QUANTIZE (page 96)
Correct the timing of your performance.
NOTE CHANGE (page 101)
Change the pitch of specific notes.
VELOCITY CHANGE (page 102)
Modify the recorded velocity (how hard the
keyboard was played) of performance data.
TRANSPOSE (page 102)
Change the key of the performance data.
ADVANCE/DELAY (page 103)
Speed up or delay the sound production of
performance data.
About the measure count
The measure count on the display corresponds to the time signature of the selected rhythm. However,
if rhythm data is stored in the RHYTHM part and that part is played back, the measure count on the display corresponds to the stored rhythm data. (Refer to page 90.)
• If you wish to use a time signature not available in the preset rhythms, use the COMPOSER to create a new time signature. (Refer to page 106.)
75
QQTG0692
Sequencer
RECORD & EDIT
These functions are recording and editing
operations used for creating a new performance.
09_Part IV.fm 76 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
Sequencer parts
The following summary explains what is stored in each SEQUENCER part.
Sequencer
Part name
[name on display]
Used for
Recorded contents
RIGHT1 [RT1]
RIGHT2 [RT2]
LEFT [LFT]
PART1 [P 1]
–PART9 [P 9]
PART11 [P 11]
–PART16 [P16]
Recording the performance of each part
(REALTIME/STEP)
• Sound and volume settings
• PART EXPRESSION
• Contents of sound and effect settings that can be set
on the MIXER display (Refer to page 150.)
• PITCH BEND wheel operation
• MODULATION wheel operation (KN2600)
DRUMS [DRM]
(PART 10)
Recording the drums
performance with the
DRUM KITS group
sounds (REALTIME/STEP)
• Sound and volume settings
• PART EXPRESSION
• Contents of sound and effect settings that can be set
on the MIXER display (Refer to page 150.)
CONTROL [CTL]
Recording changes in
the panel button status
(REALTIME/STEP)
• Rhythm setting and selection changes
• RHYTHM VARIATION 1–4 setting
• REVERB on/off
• AUTO PLAY CHORD status, volume balance
• MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER status
• FILL IN 1, 2, INTRO & ENDING 1, 2 on
• PANEL MEMORY selection changes
• TRANSPOSE status
• TECHNI-CHORD status
• START/STOP on/off
• TEMPO setting
• CONDUCTOR status
• PERFORMANCE PADS setting
• FADE IN/OUT operation
• TOTAL EXPRESSION
AUTO PLAY CHORD
[APC]
Recording chords for the
AUTO PLAY CHORD
(REALTIME)
• Chord progression
• AUTO PLAY CHORD status, volume balance
• START/STOP on/off
• FILL IN 1, 2, INTRO & ENDING 1, 2 on
CHORD [CHD]
Recording chord
progression for the
AUTO PLAY CHORD
(STEP)
• Chord progression
• FILL IN 1, 2, INTRO & ENDING 1, 2 on
RHYTHM [RHY]
Settings related to
rhythm (STEP)
• Rhythm settings and selection changes
• RHYTHM VARIATION 1–4 setting
• FILL IN 1, 2, INTRO & ENDING 1, 2 on
• START/STOP on/off
• TEMPO setting
• You can use the TRACK ASSIGN function to assign parts to tracks as you wish. (Refer to page 91.)
76
QQTG0692
09_Part IV.fm 77 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
Easy Record
Suppose you are playing the Keyboard and you wish to record and play back your performance to hear
how it sounds. You can bypass the set-up procedures of the full-scale sequencer and begin recording
quickly and easily.
• Note that by executing EASY REC, the original data in the selected song number is erased.
Recording procedure
1. Press the EASY REC button to turn it on.
SEQUENCER
PLAY EASY REC
4. Press the OK button.
• The display changes to the REALTIME
RECORD display.
5. Play the keyboard.
• Recording begins as soon as you start the
rhythm or play the keyboard.
• The display changes to the following.
6. When you have finished recording, press the
EASY REC button to turn it off.
• The PLAY button turns on.
2. Use the SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
song number in which to record (1 to 10).
• If you press the NAMING button, you can
assign a name to your song. (Refer to page
85.)
3. Set the desired sounds, effects, rhythms, etc.
Playback
1. Press the SEQUENCER RESET (FILL IN 1)
Sequencer
button.
FILL IN
1
SEQUENCER
RESET
2. Press the START/STOP button.
• Your recorded performance is played back
automatically.
• When you are finished playing back your performance, press the SEQUENCER PLAY button to turn it off.
77
QQTG0692
09_Part IV.fm 78 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
Realtime Record
With REALTIME RECORD, your performance is recorded with the timing exactly as you played it on the
keyboard. Use this mode to record your performance in up to 16 tracks and create your own orchestra or
band.
Recording procedure
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
• The display looks similar to the following.
on.
• The display changes to the following.
6. Use the buttons below the display to turn on
2. Select SEQUENCER.
• The display looks similar to the following.
•
•
• When you press the PANEL WRITE button,
the PANEL WRITE display appears. To store
the currently active settings, such as the
sounds, at the beginning of the song, press
the OK button.
3. Use the SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a
song number in which to record. (The song
number is shown on the display.)
4. Select RECORD & EDIT.
Sequencer
• The display looks similar to the following.
5. Select REALTIME RECORD.
78
QQTG0692
•
•
the “REC” indication above the track numbers
you are going to record.
While you are recording, you can play back
tracks which are already recorded. Press the
corresponding balance buttons to display
“PLAY” above the track number you wish to
have played back.
For the RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and LEFT parts,
you can select two or more tracks to record at
one time; however, to record a performance
part, the corresponding button in the CONDUCTOR must also be on. For parts that are
not in the CONDUCTOR, multiple parts cannot be recorded at one time.
To record AUTO PLAY CHORD (APC) parts,
turn on the AUTO PLAY CHORD’s OFF/ON
button. In this case, press the START/STOP
button when beginning recording.
The track for the RHYTHM (RHY) part can be
selected for recording only when STEP
RECORD is active.
7. Set the sounds, effects, volumes, etc. for the
parts you are going to record.
• If you press the MIXER button, you can use
the MIXER display to visually adjust the settings for each track.
• The LOCAL ON/OFF setting on the MIXER
display is used to specify whether the part
assigned to that track sounds when it is played
on the keyboard during recording. For the
LOCAL ON/OFF during playback, use the
TRACK ASSIGN display to adjust the settings.
(Refer to page 91.)
• If you are recording GM2 song data, select
from the GM2 group in the SOUND
EXPLORER.
• The panel settings which are active at the
beginning of recording are stored.
09_Part IV.fm 79 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
8. Use the TEMPO/PROGRAM to adjust the
recording tempo.
• The tempo is shown on the display as q =.
• If you wish to record the tempo setting and
tempo changes, store them in the control
(CTL) part, or use the step record to store
them in the rhythm (RHY) part.
9. Turn the metronome on or off as desired with
the ON/OFF button at the upper right of the
display.
• The metronome selection alternates between
ON and OFF each time the button is
pressed.
• When set to ON, the metronome volume setting display is momentarily shown.
• The metronome sound is not recorded.
10. Play the keyboard.
• Recording begins.
• You can also press the START/STOP button
to start the rhythm and begin recording.
• If the metronome is on, when you press the
START/STOP button, a two-measure count
plays, after which recording automatically
begins. In this case, the rhythm does not
start. Recording does not start until the twomeasure count is completed.
• The recording status is continuously updated
on the display:
MEASURE= indicates the current measure.
TIME SIG.= indicates the current time signature.
MEMORY= indicates the remaining memory (%) available for recording.
Sequencer
Multi-track recording
Use the following procedure to record one track
while listening to the track or tracks already
recorded.
1. Follow the procedure to record the first track,
and press the REC STOP button at the end of
the recording.
• The indication for the track just recorded
changes from “REC” to “PLAY”.
2. Turn on the “REC” indication for the track you
wish to record next, and select the sounds and
effects, etc.
3. Press the START/STOP button and begin
recording.
• Tracks for which “PLAY” is shown are played
back, and you can record in time with this.
• If you turn on the “REC” for the CONTROL
track and begin recording, the rhythm start will
not be recorded.
4. Press the REC STOP button at the end of the
recording.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for other tracks, as
desired.
6. When multi-track recording is finished, turn off
the PROGRAM MENUS button.
• If you wish to store part settings that you modified after recording as beginning song data,
press the MIXER button and follow the PANEL
WRITE procedure. (Refer to page 83.)
Sequencer
• If you wish to redo the recording, press the
REC STOP button and then record again. To
change the sounds and effects, etc. please
set them again.
• If you make a mistake in recording, you can
correct a specific portion of your performance without having to redo the whole part.
(Refer to page 84.)
11. When you have finished recording, press the
REC STOP button on the display, or turn off
the PROGRAM MENUS button.
• When the PROGRAM MENUS button is
turned off, the ending command (END) is
recorded. Note that, as long as the ending
command is not recorded, blank recording
continues even if you stop playing.
• The SEQUENCER PLAY button turns on.
79
QQTG0692
09_Part IV.fm 80 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
CYCLE RECORD
This mode allows you to have specified recording measures continuously repeated. Thus you
can record measures by adding notes during any
cycle.
1. On the REALTIME RECORD display, specify
7. When you have finished recording, press the
“REC” for a track number you are going to
record, and “PLAY” for track numbers you
wish to have played back.
REC STOP button on the display, or turn off
the PROGRAM MENUS button.
2. Press the CYCLE: OFF button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Use the START MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons
to specify the beginning measure number.
4. Use the END MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the ending measure number.
• The measure in which the END command has
been stored can also be specified.
START
1
END
2
3
4
CYCLE END MEASURE: 4
5. Press the START/STOP button.
• If the metronome is on, cycle recording of the
specified measures begins after a twomeasure count.
Sequencer
6. Play the keyboard.
• The specified measures are repeated, during
which time you can record by adding notes little by little at the correct timing (over-dubbing).
• If you wish to erase all the performance data
from the specified measures, press the
CLEAR button.
• If the CYCLE: ON button is pressed, it
changes to OFF. This button does not function
during recording.
• To return to the REALTIME RECORD display,
press the EXIT button.
• Cycle record can also be started from the
REALTIME RECORD display whenever the
CYCLE: ON indication is shown.
80
QQTG0692
09_Part IV.fm 81 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
Sequencer Play
Play back your recorded performance.
it on.
SEQUENCER
PLAY EASY REC
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. After pressing the SONG button, use the
SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a song number for playback.
3. Use the balance buttons below the display to
show “PLAY” above the track numbers you
wish to have played back.
• Highlighted track numbers indicate tracks that
are already recorded. Only highlighted track
numbers can be selected for playback.
• You can select two or more tracks to play back
at one time.
4. Press the SEQUENCER RESET (FILL IN 1)
button.
• The SEQUENCER returns to the beginning of
the song and the beginning panel settings are
recalled.
5. If you want to playback a song starting from a
point other than the first measure, use the
MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the measure
number.
• “MEASURE=” indicates the current measure
number.
6. Press the START/STOP button.
• The recorded performance is played back
from the specified measure.
• When playback is begun from a measure in
which an INTRO, COUNT INTRO, FILL IN or
ENDING is recorded, the corresponding function does not work.
• You can press the MIXER button and modify
the settings for each part.
• For information about LYRICS, refer to page
123.
7. To stop playback, press the START/STOP
button.
• If the START/STOP button is pressed again,
playback will continue from the point it was
interrupted.
8. When you are finished playing back your performance, press the SEQUENCER PLAY button to turn it off.
If a rhythm progression has been recorded in
the RHYTHM (RHY) part, the MEASURE display used in the STEP RECORD and EDIT
displays conforms to the time signature data
stored in the RHYTHM part.
Adjusting the playback tempo
Even with a song having recorded tempo data, you can use TEMPO/PROGRAM or TAP TEMPO to
adjust the tempo to your liking.
• When the tempo is changed, all the tempo data of that song is automatically changed by the same
ratio. Accordingly, even in song data in which tempo change data is stored, a single adjustment of
the tempo produces a natural-sounding playback.
• To return to the original tempo, while the song is stopped press the SEQUENCER RESET button.
Note that the tempo change is also canceled when you switch to another song or load a new song.
• The adjusted tempo is canceled when you begin the recording procedure and the original tempo
data will be recorded.
81
QQTG0692
Sequencer
1. Press the SEQUENCER PLAY button to turn
09_Part IV.fm 82 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
CYCLE PLAY
You can have specified measures played back
repeatedly.
1. On the SEQUENCER PLAY display, specify
“PLAY” for track numbers you wish to have
played back.
2. Press the CYCLE button.
• The measure in which the END command has
been stored can also be specified.
START
1
END
2
3
4
• The display looks similar to the following.
CYCLE END MEASURE: 4
5. Press the START/STOP button.
• Cycle playback of the specified measures
begins.
• Normally the rhythm pattern is not played
back.
3. Use the START MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons
to specify the beginning measure number.
4. Use the END MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the ending measure number.
6. To stop cycle playback, press the START/
STOP button again.
• During playback stop, if the SEQUENCER
RESET (FILL IN 1) button is pressed, the
SEQUENCER returns to the measure number
specified in step 3. If the SEQUENCER
RESET button is pressed again, the
SEQUENCER returns to measure 1.
• If you press the CYCLE: ON button to turn it
OFF, cycle playback is not possible.
• To return to the SEQUENCER PLAY display,
press the EXIT button.
• Cycle playback can also be specified on the
SEQUENCER PLAY display whenever the
CYCLE: ON indication is shown.
MEDLEY
Recorded songs can be played back in a medley.
1. On the SEQUENCER PLAY display, press the
Sequencer
MEDLEY button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Specify the order of songs in the medley.
• If ALL is pressed, all the files are selected, and
the songs are played back in order in a medley. If ALL is pressed again, the files are deselected.
• You can use the buttons below the display to
select a song to add to the song list, then
press the ADD button to add it to the list.
Repeat these steps to create your own list of
songs to have played back. A M01, M02 etc.
next to the file name indicates its order in the
list.
• You can delete a marked file from the medley
song list by selecting it and pressing the ADD
button.
• Use the LOOP button to specify ON or OFF
for repeat playback of the medley.
3. Press the START button.
• During medley playback, you can use the
SKIP button to skip to the next song.
82
QQTG0692
09_Part IV.fm 83 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
Naming
Here is the way to assign a name to your recorded song.
1. On the SEQ MENU display use the SONG
SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a song.
2. Press the NAMING button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Use the buttons below the display to assign a
name.
• Set the character input position with the POSITION buttons, select the characters with the
alphanumeric buttons and repeat name
assignment.
• Switch from upper to lower case letters with
the ABC, abc button.
• Press the INS button to enter a space at the
cursor position.
• Press the DEL button to erase the character at
the cursor position.
• Press the CLR button to erase the entire
name.
• Press the →← button to center the name.
4. Press the OK button.
Panel Write
You can change the panel status which is in effect at the beginning of the song. These are the settings
which are recalled when the SEQUENCER RESET button is pressed.
Then select PANEL WRITE.
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Press the OK button.
• “COMPLETED!” is shown on the display.
• PANEL WRITE is automatically activated at
the when you start to record.
• For rhythm data, the data in the RHYTHM part
has priority.
Sequencer
1. On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG ∧
and ∨ buttons to select the song number.
2. Use the panel buttons to change to the
desired panel settings.
83
QQTG0692
09_Part IV.fm 84 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
Song Select
You can select a desired song from the list of recorded songs.
1. On the SEQ MENU display, select RECORD
& EDIT.
2. On the RECORD & EDIT display, select
SONG SELECT.
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Use the SONG SELECT ▲ and ▼ buttons to
select a song.
• The total amount of memory used for the current song is shown as a percentage (%) to the
right of the song name.
• If the NAMING button is pressed, the NAMING
display appears.
• To optimize memory, songs you do not wish to
preserve should be deleted. (Refer to page
93.)
Punch Record
If you make a playing error during REALTIME RECORD or would like to change the recording for some
other reason, you can use the punch recording feature to correct a selected portion of the performance
without having to redo the whole part.
Playing error
Recording the performance
Punch in
Punch out
Replay this portion
Playback
Recording mode
Sequencer
1. On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG
SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the song
number. Then select RECORD & EDIT.
2. On the RECORD & EDIT display, select
PUNCH RECORD.
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Select the track which contains the portion you
want to correct.
• You cannot select a track in which no data is
stored.
• On the display “REC” indicates tracks which
are being recorded, and “PLAY” indicates
tracks which are being played back.
4. Use the MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
beginning measure of playback.
• “MEASURE=” indicates the current measure
number.
5. Press the START/STOP button to begin playback of the specified track.
84
QQTG0692
09_Part IV.fm 85 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
6. During playback, press the PUNCH IN button
at the point you want to begin recording.
• Recording begins as soon as the PUNCH IN
button is pressed. Begin playing at this point.
• The REC indication changes to the PUNCH
indication.
• The PUNCH IN button switches to the REC
STOP button.
7. Press the REC STOP button at the point you
want to stop recording.
• Punch recording stops immediately.
• You can also begin punch-in recording by
playing the keyboard.
• You can specify the punch-in/punch-out points
with the optional Foot Switch (sold separately). (Refer to page 172.)
Sequencer
6. Press the START/STOP button.
• Playback begins from the measure indicated
by CURRENT MEASURE on the display.
• Pertinent information, such as the FIRST
MEASURE, is shown in the upper section of
the display.
7. Correct the performance.
• The mode changes automatically to the
recording mode at the specified FIRST measure. Begin playing at this point. The mode
automatically changes back to the playback
mode at the specified LAST measure.
• To discontinue punch recording in the middle,
press the CANCEL button. In this case, the
recorded contents up to that point are erased.
AUTO PUNCH RECORD
You can also set the punch-in and punch-out
points beforehand, so that recording automatically begins and ends at the specified points.
1. On the PUNCH RECORD display, press the
AUTO: OFF button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the FIRST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the number of the punch-in measure.
3. Use the LAST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
Sequencer
specify the number of the punch-out measure.
• The number of the LAST measure must be
higher than the number of the FIRST measure.
• The specified measure is recorded.
4. Use the COUNT IN MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the number of lead-in measures you wish to have played back before the
punch-in measure.
• Set the metronome to on or off with the ON or
OFF button.
5. Press the EXIT button.
• The display changes to the PUNCH RECORD
display.
85
QQTG0692
09_Part IV.fm 86 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
Step Record
STEP RECORD is simply a method of making a tune by storing the sounds note-by-note on the display.
Instead of playing the keyboard directly as in the REALTIME RECORD mode, you can take your time to
input each single note. This is an especially effective method for storing complicated passages that are
difficult to play or when the exact timing of a part is critical.
Recording procedure
Record the keyboard performance and panel
changes.
1. On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG
SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the song
number. Then select RECORD & EDIT.
2. On the RECORD & EDIT display, select STEP
RECORD.
• The display changes to the PART SELECT
display.
4. Use the MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
measure.
• This step is not necessary if you are recording
from measure 1 of a blank track.
5. Use the CURSOR
and buttons to move
the cursor to the note position (dot) you are
going to store.
• Each dot represents one-eighth of a quarternote (a thirty-second note).
• When storing triplets, it may not be possible to
match the timing exactly with the 1/32-note
steps. However, if you select triplet-type notes
for the note length (LENGTH) in step 6 below,
the timing is automatically corrected.
6. Use the left REC NOTE LENGTH ∧ and ∨
3. Use the balance buttons below the display to
specify the track for the part you are going to
record (only one track can be selected at a
time).
• The display changes to the STEP RECORD
input display similar to the following.
buttons to specify the note value. Select from
r3, r, x3, x, e3, e, q3, q, h, w, w × 2 to 4. (A 3
denotes a triplet-type note.)
• For note values other than these, use the center REC NOTE LENGTH buttons to specify
the note value to be added to that which you
specified with the left buttons.
Example: To record a dotted quarter-note
( q. )
q+e
7. Use the right REC NOTE LENGTH ∧ and ∨
Sequencer
buttons to specify the actual length of the
produced sound for the desired legato or
staccato effect.
• If you selected the track to which the CHORD
part has been assigned, the display changes
to the STEP RECORD: CHORD display.
(Refer to page 88.)
• If you selected the track to which the
RHYTHM part has been assigned, the display
changes to the STEP RECORD: RHYTHM
display. (Refer to page 90.)
• If you selected the track to which the CONTROL part has been assigned, the display
changes to the STEP RECORD: CONTROL
display.
86
QQTG0692
TENU (tenuto): Sound is produced for 95%
of the note length.
NORM (normal): 80%
STAC (staccato): 50%
CUTT (cutting): 25%
8. Specify the pitch and velocity of the note by
playing the keyboard.
• The dot on the display where the note is
stored changes to a ∗ mark.
• When recording chords, you can store multiple
notes at one position.
09_Part IV.fm 87 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
REST:
To store a rest, after specifying the note
LENGTH, press the REST button.
• Positions at which nothing is stored are read
as rests.
ERS:
If you make a mistake, move the cursor to
the error, and after displaying the data you
wish to erase, press the ERS button.
BAL:
To specify the volume at the cursor position,
after pressing the BAL button, use the
VALUE buttons to set the volume (0 to 127).
9. Repeat steps 4 through 8 to continue storing
notes.
• To input data on another track, press the button for the desired track and repeat the procedure from step 2.
10. When you have finished recording, press the
PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it off.
Storing control data
Various control data can be stored at the cursor
position.
1. On the STEP RECORD: MELODY display,
press the CTL button.
2. Use the CTL ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
control data you wish to insert.
• Select from PAN, KEY SHIFT (COARSE
TUNE), TUNING (FINE TUNE), BEND SENS.
Correcting the data
1. In the STEP RECORD mode, specify the track
you wish to correct.
2. Use the MEAS buttons to go to the measure
you wish to modify. Use the CURSOR buttons
to move the cursor to the point ( ∗ ) you wish
to edit.
• The data stored at that point is shown on the
display.
• When multiple data is stored at one point, different data is displayed in order each time a
CURSOR button is pressed. When a chord is
recorded, a different note in the chord is displayed each time a CURSOR button is
pressed.
3. Correct the data.
There are three types of data:
Performance data
NOTE data (note pitch) and VEL data (how hard
the key was played) and LEN data (1 = 1/96 of a
quarter note [ q ]) are displayed. Use the relevant
buttons to correct the data as desired.
Sound data
The name of the sound is displayed. Change the
sound as desired (the sound setting display is
interposed on the current display).
Control data
The name of the function is displayed. Change
the data as desired.
• Press the ERS button to erase the data which
is displayed.
• You can also correct data which was stored in
the REALTIME RECORD mode.
• Performance (NOTE) data can be recorded or
edited on a piano roll display, and there is also
a specialized display for recording and editing
the DRUMS part data. (Refer to page 94.)
3. Use the VALUE ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the
numerical value of the setting.
4. Press YES button.
87
QQTG0692
Sequencer
• Any panel setting changes—for example
changes in the sound selection, button operation, wheel operation, etc.—are recorded at
the cursor position.
• When a wheel or dial is operated, the input
value is indicated on the display. Confirm
that this is the correct value and press the
YES button to record the value or the NO
button to cancel it.
Sequencer
09_Part IV.fm 88 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
Store a chord progression
Store the chord progression for the AUTO PLAY CHORD in the track for the CHORD part. Then, when
the AUTO PLAY CHORD is used during playback, even if you do not specify the chords with your left
hand, the chords change automatically.
• The chord length is specified with the CHORD STEP RECORD keys on the keyboard.
DELETE
e
&
q
h
q.
h.
Correction keys
Move back one step.
Move forward one step.
w
Repeat key
Press to end the chord-storing procedure and to specify automatic repeat
playback of the stored progression.
Note value keys
Whole note
w
Dotted half-note
h.
Half-note
h
Dotted quarter-note
q.
Quarter-note
q
Eighth-note
e
End key
Press after the whole chord progression has been stored.
Reset key
Press to begin storing from the begin&
ning.
Example of storing a chord progression
Measure 1
2
3
4
C
C
Am
F
D7
G7
w
w
h
h
h
h
1. On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG
SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the song
number. Then select RECORD & EDIT.
2. On the RECORD & EDIT display, select STEP
Sequencer
DELETE key
Press to erase data.
• To erase all the data from the current track,
while pressing the DELETE key, press the
End key (
).
DELETE
• STEP REC: CHORD can also be enabled by
pressing on the EASY RECORD button continuously a few seconds. This will display the
CHORD screen.
4. Store the chords.
<Measure 1, measure 2>
While playing a C chord with your left hand,
press the w key one time with your right hand.
w
RECORD.
• The display changes to the PART SELECT
display.
3. Using the balance buttons below the display,
select the track to which the CHORD (CHD/
APC) part has been assigned.
• The display changes to the STEP RECORD:
CHORD input display similar to the following.
88
QQTG0692
• A “beep” tone indicates that the chord has
been successfully stored.
• The dot on the display where the chord is
stored changes to a ∗ mark and the cursor
automatically moves forward, in accordance
with the specified note value, to the next unrecorded position. The chord name is shown on
the display.
09_Part IV.fm 89 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
<Measure 3>
(1) While playing an Am chord, press the h key
one time.
h
(2) While playing an F chord, press the h key one
time.
h
Correct the recorded chord progression
1. Follow the procedure to select the STEP
RECORD: CHORD display.
2. Use the MEAS buttons to go to the measure
you wish to modify. Use the and Correction keys to move the cursor to the point (∗)
you wish to edit.
• The lengths of rests are indicated by the
respective rest value × its multiplier.
Example:
Π.................1-beat rest (quarter rest)
‰ ................1/2-beat rest (eighth rest)
Œ × 1 + ‰ ....1-1/2-beat rest
(dotted quarter rest)
(2) While playing a G7 chord, press the h key one
time.
• You can press the INTRO & ENDING button
or a FILL IN button on the panel to store the
desired pattern at the cursor position. (An
INTRO or COUNT INTRO can be stored only
at the beginning.)
• Store a rest by pressing a note value key without specifying a chord.
5. At the end of the chord progression, press the
End key (
).
• The Keyboard exits the recording mode.
• During playback, playback of the recorded
chord progression stops at this point. For
automatic repeat playback of the chord progression, press the Repeat key (
) instead
of the End key (
).
• When you play back the track for the CHORD
part, the chords of the automatic accompaniment change in accordance with the stored
chord progression.
• To specify chords by the <one finger> mode,
select the BASIC mode before entering the
STEP RECORD mode.
• If the ON BASS button is on, chords such as
“C on G” can also be specified (except in the
<one finger> mode).
• The CHORD FINDER feature, which shows
you how to finger a specified chord, is available. (Refer to page 55.)
• To go to the end of the chord progression,
while pressing the Reset key ( & ), press the
key.
3. Correct the chord data.
Chord data
When the chord name is displayed at the cursor
position, you can press the DELETE key to
erase the data and then store a new chord.
• If you do not erase the displayed data before
entering new chord data, the new data is
inserted at this point, and the displayed data is
merely shifted by the note value of the new
chord.
• Rests can also be erased. Each time the
DELETE key is pressed, the rest is erased in
units of Œ × 1. The ‰ rest is erased last.
• If you wish to cancel the REPEAT, enter an
END command.
Control data
The name of the stored function (INTRO, FILL,
etc.) is displayed. You can press the DELETE
key to erase the data which is displayed.
TRACK CLEAR
To erase all data from the current track, press
the CLR button, and then press the YES button
on the confirmation display.
• If you wish to cancel the clear procedure,
press the NO button.
89
QQTG0692
Sequencer
<Measure 4>
(1) While playing a D7 chord, press the h key one
time.
Œ × 10........10-beat rest
09_Part IV.fm 90 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
Store a rhythm progression
Changes in the rhythm selection and tempo, as well as the intro, fill-ins and the ending, can be stored by
measures with the step recording method.
1. On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG ∧
and ∨ buttons to select the song number.
Then select RECORD & EDIT.
2. On the RECORD & EDIT display, select STEP
RECORD.
• The display changes to the PART SELECT
display.
3. Using the balance buttons below the display,
select the track to which the RHYTHM (RHY)
part has been assigned.
• The display changes to the STEP RECORD:
RHYTHM input display similar to the following.
4. Use the MEAS ▲ and ▼ buttons to go to the
measure you wish to record.
Sequencer
5. Store the rhythm data.
• Data which can be stored:
START/STOP
Changes in the rhythm selection
RHYTHM VARIATION 1–4,
COUNT INTRO, INTRO, FILL IN,
ENDING
Tempo changes
• Be sure to store the START/STOP data in the
measure in which the rhythm starts or stops.
• If you are storing a COUNT INTRO or INTRO,
store this data before the START/STOP data.
• If the tempo is changed, the display changes
to the confirmation display. After specifying
the desired tempo, Press the YES button to
store the specified tempo, or press the NO
button to cancel the new tempo value.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to continue storing the
rhythm progression.
90
QQTG0692
7. At the end of the rhythm progression, press
the END button.
• If the REP button is pressed instead of the
END button, during playback the recorded
rhythm progression is repeated.
• The Keyboard exits the recording mode.
Correct the recorded rhythm progression
1. Follow the procedure to select the STEP
RECORD: RHYTHM display.
2. Use the MEAS buttons to go to the measure
you wish to modify. (The ∗ is highlighted.)
3. Correct the rhythm data.
• Press the ERS button to erase data at the cursor position.
• If you wish to cancel the REPEAT, enter an
END command.
• If you select a rhythm with a different time signature, the time signature of all subsequent
measures will also change.
• If data has already been recorded in other
tracks, you cannot select a rhythm with a different time signature.
TRACK CLEAR
To erase all data from the current track, press
the CLR button, and then press the YES button
on the confirmation display.
• If you wish to cancel the clear procedure,
press the NO button.
09_Part IV.fm 91 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
Track Assign
Each SEQUENCER part is already assigned to a track number. However, you can use the TRACK
ASSIGN function to assign parts to tracks as you wish.
1. On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG
SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the song
number. Then select RECORD & EDIT.
2. On the RECORD & EDIT display, select
TRACK ASSIGN.
• The display looks similar to the following.
TRACK ASSIGN PRESETS
A preset track assignment can be selected.
1. On the TRACK ASSIGN display, press the
PRESET button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
track.
4. Use the TRACK ASSIGN ∧ and ∨ buttons to
select the part for the specified track.
• When a part other than the CONTROL, APC,
CHORD or RHYTHM part is assigned, the
track assign procedure is completed at this
point.
• Either the CHORD part or APC part can be
assigned to a track, but not both.
• The CONTROL, APC, CHORD and RHYTHM
parts cannot be assigned to more than one
track.
• You can use the ON and OFF buttons for
LOCAL CONT. to specify whether or not the
sound of the part assigned to this track is generated. Because no sound is generated for
this instrument’s parts assigned to tracks set
to OFF through this procedure, use this setting
to generate sound from an external sound
source through the MIDI connectors.
• You can use the MIDI OUT ON and OFF buttons to specify whether or not the data of the
part assigned to this track is sent as MIDI
data. When set to OFF, the data is not sent,
even if MIDI equipment is connected.
song number for which the preset track
assignment will be effective.
• If ALL is selected, the track assignment is
effective for all the songs.
3. Select the track assign mode.
INITIAL:
Factory-preset settings.
TECHNICS MULTI RECORDING:
The optimum track assignment for multiplex
recording.
GM MULTI RECORDING:
The optimum track assignment for creating
GENERAL MIDI data.
4. Press the OK button.
• “COMPLETED!” is shown on the display and
the selected track assign mode is enabled.
• You can confirm the track assignment settings
on the TRACK ASSIGN display.
Sequencer
3. Use the TR ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the
5. When
assigning the CONTROL, APC,
CHORD or RHYTHM part, press the OK button.
91
QQTG0692
09_Part IV.fm 92 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
Quantize
The QUANTIZE function can correct the timing of your performance after it has been recorded. If the
rhythm is slightly out of sync or inexact, it will automatically be corrected to the specified quantize level.
1. On the SEQ MENU display, select RECORD
& EDIT.
2. On the RECORD & EDIT display, select
QUANTIZE.
• The display looks similar to the following.
7. Use the STRENGTH ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
the amount of quantize (%).
• 100% is a convenient setting. When set to
100%, the performance data is quantized
exactly to the level specified for the VALUE
(“just”). For example, at 50%, the data is quantized to a point that is half that of the just level.
By this setting, you can attain an effect that is
very slightly off-beat from the rhythm.
8. Use the WINDOW ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify
Rhythm as written
in the score
Timing of actual
performance
Quantized
performance
the range (%) affected by the quantize setting.
• With the increment set to 100 for the VALUE,
at a + setting, data close to the just point is
corrected, and at a – setting, data far from the
just point is corrected. For example, if set to
–30% the quantize function affects data far
from the just point, and if set to +30% the
quantize function affects data close to the just
point. +100% is usually a convenient setting.
• The +100% setting and the –100% setting are
the same.
Example: When VALUE is set to q
3. Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify
the track number.
• You cannot select the track for the CONTROL,
RHYTHM or CHORD part.
• If ALL is selected, all the tracks are quantized.
4. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to
e
100%
50%
just
50%
100%
+100%
+50%
+30%
–50%
–30%
–100%
specify the start point (measure number).
Sequencer
5. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the end point (measure number).
6. Use the VALUE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
quantize level.
• Select from q, e, e3, x, x3, r, r3. (A 3 denotes a
triplet-type note.)
92
QQTG0692
9. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the
YES button to execute the function, or press
the NO button to cancel the function.
09_Part IV.fm 93 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
Song Clear
Erase the recorded contents of all tracks.
1. On tne SEQ MENU display, select RECORD
& EDIT.
2. On the RECORD & EDIT display, selct SONG
CLEAR.
• The display looks similar to the following.
4. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the
YES button to execute the function, or press
the NO button to cancel the function.
• If the YES button is pressed, “COMPLETED!”
appears on the display, the specified songs
are erased.
3. Use the SONG No./ALL ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the number of the song to erase.
• The data size (KB) and the total amount of
SEQUENCER memory or current song memory used is shown as a percentage (%) to the
right of the song name.
• If ALL is selected, all the songs recorded in
the SEQUENCER will be erased.
Track Clear
Erase the contents of a specific track.
1. On the SEQ MENU display, select RECORD
& EDIT.
2. On the RECORD & EDIT display, select
• The confirmation display appears. Press the
YES button to execute the function, or press
the NO button to cancel the function.
• If the YES button is pressed, the specified
tracks are erased.
Sequencer
TRACK CLEAR.
• The display looks similar to the following.
4. Press the OK button.
3. Use the balance buttons to select the track or
tracks you wish to clear.
• A “CLR” mark is shown for the selected tracks.
93
QQTG0692
09_Part IV.fm 94 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
Note Edit
You can edit performance (NOTE) data on a piano roll display. This differs from the normal STEP
RECORD edit procedure, and is a convenient way to check the data for each note.
• Data other than NOTE data cannot be corrected or recorded. To correct or record other types of data,
use the STEP RECORD display. (Refer to page 86.)
1. On the SEQ MENU display, select RECORD
& EDIT.
2. On the RECORD & EDIT display, select
NOTE EDIT.
3. On the PART SELECT display, select a track.
• The CHORD, RHYTHM and CONTROL tracks
cannot be selected.
• The display looks similar to the following.
6. Select the data to edit (it changes to a highlighted horizontal bar). Edit the data.
• Use the POS ▲ and ▼ buttons to move the
cursor, the NOTE ∧ and ∨ buttons to change
the note number, the VEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to
change the velocity (how hard the keys are
played), and the LEN ∧ and ∨ buttons to
change the note length (1 = 1/96 of a quarter
note [ q ]).
• Use the GRAPH ▲ and ▼ buttons to view a
higher or lower section of the keyboard (in
one-octave steps).
• If the ERS button is pressed, the selected
NOTE data is erased.
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 to continue editing.
4. Use the MEAS ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the
measure you wish to edit.
5. Use the CURSOR and buttons to move
Sequencer
the cursor ( ▼ ) to the point you wish to edit.
• Recorded performance (NOTE) data is shown
as horizontal bars. Data selected for editing is
highlighted.
• You can use the INC ∧ and ∨ buttons to
change the increment of cursor movement.
The resolution can be set at q /96. However, if
NOTE data is present between increments,
the cursor will stop.
• Use the POS ▲ and ▼ buttons to change the
value.
• Example: 10.2.48 indicates a point in measure
10, beat 2, point 48 (one point is 1/96 of a
quarter note [ q ]).
•
is shown at the point where the END command is stored.
94
QQTG0692
Inserting note data
You can also store note data on this display.
1. Specify the point where the new note data will
be stored.
2. Use the LEN ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
note length.
• Examples of note lengths ( q = 96)
91: tenuto (95%)
76: normal (80%)
48: staccato (50%)
24: cutting (25%)
3. Play a key on the keyboard to specify the note
pitch (NOTE NUMBER) and velocity (how
hard the key is played).
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to input more note data.
09_Part IV.fm 95 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
CYCLE PLAY
You can aurally check the data you are editing by
accessing the CYCLE PLAY display from the
NOTE EDIT display.
• If you wish other tracks to be played back,
they should be selected beforehand on the
SEQUENCER PLAY display. (Refer to page
81.)
4. Press the START/STOP button.
• Cycle playback of the specified measures
begins.
• If the SOLO button is turned on, playback
changes to that of the recording track only. If it
is turned off, all the tracks specified on the
SEQUENCER PLAY display are played back.
1. On the NOTE EDIT display, press the PLAY
5. To stop cycle playback, press the START/
button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
STOP button again.
• During playback stop, if the SEQUENCER
RESET (FILL IN 1) button is pressed, the
SEQUENCER returns to the measure number
specified in step 2. If the SEQUENCER
RESET button is pressed again, the
SEQUENCER returns to measure 1.
2. Use the START MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons
to select the beginning playback measure.
3. Use the END MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
select the last playback measure.
Drum Edit
The DRUMS part can be edited on a specialized display. This differs from the normal STEP RECORD edit
procedure, and is a convenient way to check the data for each note.
& EDIT.
2. On the RECORD & EDIT display, select
DRUM EDIT.
3. On the PART SELECT display, select the
track for the DRUMS part.
• The CHORD, RHYTHM and CONTROL tracks
cannot be selected.
• The display looks similar to the following.
4. Use the SOUND ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
percussion instrument you wish to edit.
• The number to the left of the instrument name
is its MIDI NOTE NUMBER in the Technics
arrangement.
• If sounds other than percussion instrument
sounds are assigned, they are not displayed.
5. Use the MEAS ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the
measure you wish to edit.
6. Use the CURSOR and buttons to move
the cursor (▼) to the point you wish to edit.
• Recorded performance data is shown as vertical bars. Data selected for editing is highlighted.
• You can use the INC ∧ and ∨ buttons to
change the increment of cursor movement.
The resolution can be set at q /96. However, if
NOTE data is present between increments,
the cursor will stop.
• Use the POS ▲ and ▼ buttons to change the
value.
(Continued on the next page)
95
QQTG0692
Sequencer
1. On the SEQ MENU display, select RECORD
09_Part IV.fm 96 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Example: 10.2.48 indicates a point in measure
10, beat 2, point 48 (one point is 1/96 of a
quarter note [ q ]).
•
is shown at the point where the END command is stored.
7. Select the data to edit (it changes to a long
bar). Edit the data.
• Use the POS ▲ and ▼ buttons to move the
cursor, the SND ∧ and ∨ buttons to change
the percussion instrument sound, and the VEL
∧ and ∨ buttons to change the velocity (how
hard the keys are played).
• If the ERS button is pressed, the selected
NOTE data is erased.
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 to continue editing.
Sequencer
Inserting DRUMS data
You can also store DRUMS data on this display.
1. Specify the point where the new note data will
be stored.
2. Use the VEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
velocity (how hard the key is played).
3. Press the ENTER button to store the data.
• Instead of the ENTER button, you can store
data (including velocity data) by playing the
keyboard. In this case, the instrument is that
specified on the display, regardless of which
key is played.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to input more DRUMS
data.
Sequencer
CYCLE PLAY
You can aurally check the data you are editing by
accessing the CYCLE PLAY display from the
DRUM EDIT display.
• The procedure is the same as for NOTE EDIT.
• If you wish other tracks to be played back,
they should be selected beforehand on the
SEQUENCER PLAY display. (Refer to page
81.)
96
QQTG0692
09_Part IV.fm 97 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
Copy and paste the recorded data
You can copy and paste specific portions of the recorded data.
Select the function
1. On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG
SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the number
TRACK COPY
Copy the recorded data from specific tracks of a
song.
of the song. Then select COPY & PASTE.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. On the COPY & PASTE display, select a function.
3. Perform the editing procedures. (See below.)
• During the editing procedure, if the indicator
for the TEMPO/PROGRAM is lit, you can use
the TEMPO/PROGRAM for the editing function.
SONG COPY
Copy all the recording data of a song to a specific song memory.
1. Specify the track you wish to copy from.
• On the FROM side, use the SONG ∧ and ∨
buttons and TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a track.
• If ALL is selected, all the tracks of the specified song number will be copied.
2. Specify the track you wish to copy to (TO
side).
3. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the
YES button to execute the function, or press
the NO button to cancel the function.
• The track assignment settings are also copied.
Note that in some cases, the CONTROL,
RHYTHM and CHORD part data in the destination tracks may be lost.
1. On the FROM side, use the SONG ∧ and ∨
Sequencer
buttons to select the song number you wish to
copy from.
2. On the TO side, use the SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the song number to copy to.
3. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the
YES button to execute the function, or press
the NO button to cancel the function.
97
QQTG0692
09_Part IV.fm 98 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
TRACK MERGE
MEASURE COPY
Merge the recorded contents of two tracks
(source tracks) and store the merged contents in
a third track (destination track).
• When the TRACK MERGE function is executed, the data is erased from the two source
tracks.
Copy recorded data of specified measures to a
specified point.
• On the destination track, the new data
replaces the current measure contents.
1. Specify the measures you wish to copy from
1. Select the two source tracks (FROM).
• On the FROM side, use the TRACK ∧ and ∨
buttons to select the two source tracks.
• You cannot select the track to which the CONTROL, RHYTHM or CHORD part has been
assigned.
• If the part assigned to the left source track
(“left” meaning its position on the TRACK
MERGE display) is different from the part
assigned to the right source track, when the
parts are merged in the destination track, the
new track is assigned the same part as the left
track.
2. Select the destination track (TO).
• Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to the right of
the display to specify the track number.
3. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the
YES button to execute the function, or press
the NO button to cancel the function.
the source track (FROM).
• On the FROM side, specify the settings with
the corresponding buttons.
TRACK:
Specify the track number you wish to copy
the measures from.
• You cannot select the track for the
RHYTHM part or CHORD part in which a
repeat command has been stored.
• If ALL is selected, the specified measures
are copied to all tracks at the same time.
FIRST MEAS:
Specify the first measure to copy.
LAST MEAS:
Specify the last measure to copy.
2. Specify where you wish to copy the selected
measures to.
• On the TO side, specify the settings with the
corresponding buttons.
TRACK:
Specify the track number you wish to copy
to.
• Measures in a track for the CONTROL,
RHYTHM or CHORD part can be copied
only to the same track.
Sequencer
START MEAS:
Specify the start point to copy the selected
measures to.
REPEAT:
Specify the number of times the selected
measures are to be repeated.
3. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the
YES button to execute the function, or press
the NO button to cancel the function.
• Note that if the END command is included in
the source data, it is also copied. Any data following the END command is not copied.
98
QQTG0692
09_Part IV.fm 99 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
MEASURE ERASE
MEASURE DELETE
Erase the recorded contents of specific measures. You can also specify which type of data is
to be erased.
• Note that only the contents of the measures
are erased, not the measures themselves; the
length of the performance remains the same.
Delete specified measures from a track.
• The length of the performance accordingly
decreases by the number of deleted measures.
1. Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
1. Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify
the track number.
• This function does not work for the RHYTHM
part or CHORD part in which a repeat command has been stored.
• If ALL is selected, data is erased from the
specified measures of all the tracks at one
time.
2. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the start point (measure number).
3. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the end point (measure number).
4. Use the ERASE DATA ∧ and ∨ buttons to
track from which measures are to be deleted.
• This function does not work for the CHORD or
RHYTHM track in which the repeat function
has been stored.
• If ALL is selected, the specified measures are
deleted from all the tracks at one time.
2. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons, to
specify the first measure to delete.
3. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the last measure to delete.
4. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the
YES button to execute the function, or press
the NO button to cancel the function.
specify the type of data to be erased.
Sequencer
ALL:
All data is erased.
NOTE:
Only note data is erased.
CONTROL:
Only control data (volume, effect and other
panel settings as well as selection changes)
is erased.
5. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the
YES button to execute the function, or press
the NO button to cancel the function.
99
QQTG0692
09_Part IV.fm 100 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
MEASURE INSERT
APC TO SMF CONVERT
Insert specified measures at a specified point.
• The length of the performance accordingly
increases by the number of inserted measures.
This function converts data to Standard MIDI File
(SMF) format, allowing you to play back song
data created using this instrument’s automatic
accompaniment and/or PERFORMANCE PADS
on an external sequencer or sound generator.
1. Specify the measures you wish to copy from
the source track.
• On the FROM side, specify the settings with
the corresponding buttons.
TRACK:
Specify the track number you wish to copy
the measures from.
• This function does not work for the CHORD
or RHYTHM track in which the repeat function has been stored.
• If ALL is selected, the measures are
inserted in all tracks at the same time.
FIRST MEASURE:
Specify the first measure to copy.
1. Use the TR ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the
track you wish to convert.
• In the PART column, the part name currently
assigned is shown.
• In the DATA column, a check mark (√) indicates a track in which data is stored.
• Tracks in which RHYTHM, CONTROL, APC
and CHORD parts are stored cannot be
selected (− − − is shown).
2. Use the APC/PAD ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
the parts you wish to convert.
• Parts that are set to OFF will not be converted.
3. Press the CONVERT button.
LAST MEASURE:
Specify the last measure to copy.
2. Specify where you wish to insert the selected
measures.
• On the TO side, specify the settings with the
corresponding buttons.
Sequencer
TRACK:
Specify the track number.
• Measures from the CHORD, RHYTHM or
CONTROL track can only be inserted in the
same track.
START MEASURE:
Specify the start point to insert the selected
measures.
REPEAT:
Specify the number of times the selected
measures are to be repeated.
3. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the
YES button to execute the function, or press
the NO button to cancel the function.
• Note that if the END command is included in
the source data, it is also inserted. Any data
following the END command is not inserted.
100
QQTG0692
• Note that after the conversion, the
APC/CHORD part data is cleared; if necessary, save this data beforehand.
• A confirmation display appears. Press EXECUTE to continue with the conversion, or
press the CANCEL button is you wish to discontinue.
• After the EXECUTE button is pressed, the
conversion begins. Conversion takes the
same length of time as playback.
• If you wish to discontinue the conversion process midway, press the ABORT button.
09_Part IV.fm 101 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
Changing the note position etc. of the
recorded data
You can change the note pitch and position etc. of recorded data.
Select the function
NOTE CHANGE
1. On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG ∧
and ∨ buttons to select the number of the
Change of pitch of specified notes.
song. Then select RANGE EDIT.
• The display looks similar to the following.
1. Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
tion.
3. Perform the editing procedures. (See below.)
2. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to
• During the editing procedure, if the indicator
for the TEMPO/PROGRAM is lit, you can use
the TEMPO/PROGRAM for the editing function.
3. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec-
specify the start point (measure number) of
the note change.
ify the end point (measure number) of the note
change.
4. Use the TARGET NOTE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the pitch of the note you wish to
change.
• The number next to the note name is its note
number.
5. Use the CHANGE TO ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the pitch you wish to change to.
6. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the
YES button to execute the function, or press
the NO button to cancel the function.
101
QQTG0692
Sequencer
2. On the RANGE EDIT display, select a func-
track you wish to edit.
• You cannot select the track for the CONTROL,
RHYTHM or CHORD part.
• If ALL is selected, all tracks will be edited.
09_Part IV.fm 102 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
Sequencer
VELOCITY CHANGE
TRANSPOSE
Modify the recorded velocity in specific measures of specific tracks.
Change of key of specific measures of specific
tracks.
1. Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
1. Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
track you wish to edit.
• You cannot select the track for the CONTROL,
RHYTHM or CHORD part.
• If ALL is selected, all tracks will be edited.
track you wish to edit.
• You cannot select the track for the CONTROL,
RHYTHM or CHORD part.
• If ALL is selected, all tracks will be edited.
2. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to
2. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the start point (measure number) of
the velocity change.
specify the start point (measure number) of
the transpose.
3. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec-
3. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec-
ify the end point (measure number) of the
velocity change.
ify the end point (measure number) of the
transpose.
4. Use the VELOCITY ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify
4. Use the TRANSPOSE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
the change in velocity.
• The value you select will be added to or
deleted from the current velocity.
specify the change in pitch.
• Increments are in semitones. A value of 12 is
one octave. A – value lowers the pitch, and a
+ value raises it.
5. Press the OK button.
Sequencer
• The confirmation display appears. Press the
YES button to execute the function, or press
the NO button to cancel the function.
102
QQTG0692
5. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the
YES button to execute the function, or press
the NO button to cancel the function.
09_Part IV.fm 103 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後1時34分
Part IV
ADVANCE/DELAY
Speed up or delay the sound production of specified performance data.
Sequencer
3. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the end point (measure number) of the
change.
4. Use the ADVANCE/DELAY ∧ and ∨ buttons
to accelerate or delay the timing of the sound
production (–96 to +96).
• A + value causes the notes to sound later, and
a – value causes the notes to sound earlier.
5. Press the OK button.
1. Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
track you wish to edit.
• You cannot select the track for the CONTROL,
RHYTHM or CHORD part.
• If ALL is selected, all tracks will be edited.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the
YES button to execute the function, or press
the NO button to cancel the function.
2. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the start point (measure number) of
the change.
SD Audio Synchro (KN2600)
The sound data on the SD card in the SD slot can be synchronized with SEQUENCER playback.
1. On the SEQ MENU display, press the SD
AUDIO SYNCHRO button.
2. Use the PLAYLIST NUMBER ∧ and ∨ buttons
Sequencer
to select the number you wish to synchronize
from the PLAYLIST.
3. Play back the SEQUENCER song. (Refer to
page 81.)
<Note>
When creating SEQUENCER data that is synchronized with SD AUDIO data, the environment
in which the SD AUDIO data was created may
result in data that is slightly out of sync with the
SEQUENCER. When this occurs use the
TEMPO ADJUST feature to compensate for this
timing discrepancy (–127 to +127).
103
QQTG0692
01_Caution for AC Mains Lead.fm 3 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時40分
THE FOLLOWING APPLIES ONLY
IN THE U.S.A. AND CANADA
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE SCREWS.
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead
symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user
to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of
sufficient magnitude to constitute a
risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an
equilateral triangle is intended to
alert the user to the presence of
important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the
appliance.
(for U.S.A. and Canada)
CAUTION:
TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK MATCH WIDE
BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC
SHOCK OR PRODUCT DAMAGE, DO NOT EXPOSE
THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE, DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS
FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL
BE PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.
THE FOLLOWING APPLIES
ONLY IN THE U.S.A.
CAUTION:
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio
or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one
or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment
and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
FCC Warning:
To assure continued FCC emission limit compliance, use only the provided power supply cord and
the shielded interface cable when connecting this
device to the computer.
Also, any unauthorized changes or modifications to
this equipment would void the user’s authority to
operate this device.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Responsible Party:
Matshshita Electric Corporation of America
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ, 07094 USA
Telephone No.: 1-800-211-7262
THE FOLLOWING APPLIES ONLY IN THE U.S.A.
Notice:
This product has a fluorescent lamp that contains a
small amount of mercury.
It also contains lead in some components. Disposal of
these materials may be regulated in your community
due to environmental considerations.
For disposal or recycling information please contact
your local authorities, or the Electronics Industries
Alliance: <http://www.eiae.org>
The model number and serial number are found
underneath the keyboard.
Please note the model and serial numbers in the
space provided below and retain this sheet as a
permanent record of your purchase to aid identification
in the event of theft.
MODEL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN TROPICAL CLIMATES.
DENNA ENHET ÄR AVSEDD FÖR ANVÄNDNING PÅ PLATSER MED TROPISKT KLIMAT.
TÄMÄ LAITE ON TARKOITETTU KÄYTETTÄVÄKSI TROOPPISESSA ILMASTOSSA.
DETTE APPARATET ER BEREGNET TIL BRUK UNDER TROPISKE KLIMAFORHOLD.
3
QQTG0692
01_Caution for AC Mains Lead.fm 4 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時40分
4
QQTG0692
01_Caution for AC Mains Lead.fm 5 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時40分
THE FOLLOWING APPLIES ONLY IN THE U.S.A.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read these operating instructions carefully before using the unit. Follow the safety instructions on the unit and the
safety precautions listed below. Keep these operating instructions handy for future reference.
Safety
1. Power Source—Connect the unit to a power
source of the type described in these instructions or
as marked on the unit.
2. Polarization—The unit is equipped with a polarized
power plug where one blade is wider than the other.
This safety feature ensures that the plug fits into
your household AC outlet only one way. If the plug
doesn’t fit one way, try reversing it. If the plug still
doesn’t fit, contact an electrician to replace the
obsolete outlet. Do not attempt to defeat the safety
purpose of the plug.
3. Power Cord protection—Route the AC power
supply cord so that it will not be walked on or
pinched by items placed on or against it. Never take
hold of the plug or cord with wet hands. Always
grasp the plug body firmly when connecting and
disconnecting it.
4. Overloading—When connecting the AC power
supply cord, be careful not to overload the
household AC outlet, extension cord, or outlet from
any other device as this can result in fire or electric
shock.
5. Nonuse periods—Turn the unit off when it is not in
use. Unplug the unit from the household AC outlet if
it is not to be used for a long time. Unplug the unit
during lightning storms.
6. Attachments and accessories—Use only the
attachments and accessories recommended in
these operating instructions.
Installation
Placement
1. Ventilation—Situate the unit so that it receives
proper ventilation. Do not install in a confined space
such as a bookcase or cabinet. Allow at least 10 cm
(4 inches) clearance from the rear of the unit. To
prevent the risk of electric shock or fire due to overheating ensure curtains and other materials do not
obstruct the unit’s ventilation.
2. Foreign material—Ensure objects and liquids do
not get into the unit. Avoid exposing the unit to
excessive smoke, dust, mechanical vibration, and
shock.
3. Magnetism—Situate the unit away from equipment
and devices that generate strong magnetic fields.
4. Stacking—Do not place heavy objects on top of
this unit.
5. Surface—Place the unit on a flat, level surface.
6. Carts and stands—Use the unit only
with carts and stands recommended by
the manufacturer. Move carts with care.
Sudden stops, excessive force, and
uneven surfaces can cause carts to
overturn.
7. Wall and ceiling mounting—Do not mount the unit
on walls or ceilings unless specified in the
instructions.
Environment
1. Water and moisture—Do not use the unit near
water, such as near a bathtub or swimming pool.
Avoid damp basements.
2. Heat—Situate the unit away from heat sources,
such as radiators.
Do not situate where temperatures fall below 5°C
(41°F) or rise above 35°C (95°F).
Maintenance
(See page 6 for details.)
Unplug the unit from the household AC outlet before
cleaning.
Clean with a damp cloth.
Do not use abrasive pads, scouring powders, or
solvents.
Service
1. Damage Requiring Service—The unit should be
serviced by qualified service personnel if:
(a) The AC power supply cord or the plug has been
damaged; or
(b) Objects or liquids have gotten into the unit; or
(c) The unit has been exposed to rain; or
(d) The unit does not operate normally or exhibits a
marked change in performance; or
(e) The unit has been dropped or the cabinet damaged.
2. Servicing—Do not attempt to service the unit
beyond that described in these operating
instructions. Refer all other servicing to authorized
servicing personnel.
3. Replacement parts—When parts need replacing
ensure the servicer uses parts specified by the
manufacturer or parts that have the same
characteristics as the original parts. Unauthorized
substitutes may result in fire, electric shock, or other
hazards.
4. Safety check—After repairs or service, ask the
servicer to perform safety checks to confirm that the
unit is in proper working condition.
5
QQTG0692
01_Caution for AC Mains Lead.fm 6 ページ 2003年2月7日 金曜日 午前11時32分
Cautions for safest use of this unit
Installation location
If operation seems abnormal
1. A well-ventilated place.
Immediately turn off the power, disconnect the
power cord plug from the electrical outlet, and contact the store where it was purchased.
Take care not to use this unit in a place where it
will not receive sufficient ventilation, and not to
permit the ventilation holes to be covered by curtains, or any similar materials.
2. Place away from direct sunlight and excessive
heat from heating equipment.
3. A place where humidity, vibration and dust are
minimized.
Discontinue using the unit at once. Failure to do so
may result in additional damage or some other
unexpected damage or accident.
• Because the power source is located inside the
unit, it is normal for the cabinet to become warm.
A word about the power cord
Power source
1. Be sure the line voltage selector is in accordance
with local voltage in your area before connecting
the plug to the socket.
2. DC power cannot be used.
Handling the power cord
1. Never touch the power cord, or its plug, with wet
hands.
2. Don’t pull the power cord.
Metal items inside the unit may
result in electric shock or damage.
Do not permit metal articles to get inside the unit.
Be especially careful with regard to this point if
children are near this unit. They should be warned
never to try to put anything inside.
If, nevertheless, some such article does get inside,
disconnect the power cord plug from the electrical
outlet, and contact the store where the unit was
purchased.
If water gets into the unit
Disconnect the power cord plug from the electrical
outlet, and contact the store where it was purchased.
As a precaution, it is suggested that flower vases
and other containers which hold liquids not be
placed on the top of this unit.
• This product may receive radio interference
caused by mobile telephones during use. If such
interference is apparent, please increase separation between the product and the mobile telephone.
• Keep the SD Memory Card out of the reach of
children to prevent them from swallowing it.
(KN2600)
If the power cord is scarred, is partially cut or
bronken, or has a bad contact, it may cause a fire or
serious electrical shock if used. NEVER use a damaged power cord for any appliance. Moreover, the
power cord should never be forcibly bent.
Don’t touch the inside parts of this
unit.
Some places inside this unit have high voltage
potential. Never try to remove the top or back
panels of this unit, or to touch inside parts by hand
or with tools.
Contact someone who is qualified in order to
inspect the inside, or to replace a fuse, if such
becomes necessary. Never attempt to do these
things yourself.
Maintenance
The following suggestions will assist you in keeping
the unit in top condition.
• Be sure to switch the instrument off after use,
and do not switch the unit on and off in quick
succession, as this places an undue load on the
electronic components.
• To keep the luster of the surface and buttons,
simply use a clean, damp cloth; polish with a
soft, dry cloth. Polish may be used but do not use
thinners or petro-chemical-based polishes.
• A wax-based polish may be used on the cabinet,
although you will find that rubbing with a soft
cloth will suffice.
SVENSK:
• Det kan inträffa att den här produkten under
användningen tar emot radiostörningar,
orsakade av mobiltelefoner. Öka avståndet
mellan produkten och mobiltelefonen om
störningarna är uppenbara.
• Håll SD-minneskortet utom räckhåll för barn, för
att förhindra att ett barn sväljer det. (KN2600)
SERVICE MUST BE CARRIED OUT BY DEALER
OR OTHER QUALIFIED PERSON
6
QQTG0692
02_Contents.fm 7 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時41分
Contents
Cautions for safest use of this unit............................................................................. 6
Controls and functions (KN2400).............................................................................. 10
Controls and functions (KN2600).............................................................................. 12
BASIC FUNCTIONS
Getting started .................................................................................................. 14
See and listen to the demonstration ................................................................. 16
Add effects ........................................................................................................ 17
Play back commercial song disks (DIRECT PLAY) (KN2400).......................... 18
Play back SD cards (SD-AUDIO PLAY) (KN2600) ........................................... 19
Select the registration for a music style (MUSIC STYLIST) ............................. 20
Automatic panel settings (ONE TOUCH PLAY)................................................ 22
Store your panel settings (PANEL MEMORY).................................................. 24
Record your performance (SEQUENCER) ....................................................... 25
Save data on an SD card (KN2600) ................................................................. 27
Load rhythm data from a Technics pattern disk
(COMPOSER LOAD) (KN2400).................................................................... 29
PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS
About the display .............................................................................................. 30
Favorites ........................................................................................................... 33
Part I Sounds and effects .................................................................................. 35
Overview of sounds and effects........................................................................ 35
Selecting sounds............................................................................................... 36
Digital Drawbar ................................................................................................. 37
Assigning parts to the keyboard........................................................................ 39
Effects ............................................................................................................... 41
Controller .......................................................................................................... 45
Transpose ......................................................................................................... 46
Techni-chord ..................................................................................................... 47
Part II Playing the rhythm .................................................................................. 48
Overview of rhythm performance...................................................................... 48
Selecting rhythms ............................................................................................. 49
Playing the rhythm ............................................................................................ 51
Auto Play Chord................................................................................................ 52
Fade In/Fade Out.............................................................................................. 57
Sound Arranger................................................................................................. 59
One Touch Play ................................................................................................ 60
Music Stylist ...................................................................................................... 60
Music Style Arranger......................................................................................... 62
Panel Memory................................................................................................... 64
Part III Performance Pads .................................................................................. 67
Playing phrases ................................................................................................ 67
Copying phrases ............................................................................................... 68
Compile............................................................................................................. 70
Record a phrase ............................................................................................... 71
Part IV Sequencer ................................................................................................ 73
Outline of the Sequencer .................................................................................. 73
Sequencer parts................................................................................................ 76
Easy Record ..................................................................................................... 77
Realtime Record ............................................................................................... 78
7
QQTG0692
02_Contents.fm 8 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時41分
Sequencer Play................................................................................................. 81
Naming.............................................................................................................. 83
Panel Write ....................................................................................................... 83
Song Select....................................................................................................... 84
Punch Record ................................................................................................... 84
Step Record ...................................................................................................... 86
Track Assign ..................................................................................................... 91
Quantize............................................................................................................ 92
Song Clear ........................................................................................................ 93
Track Clear ....................................................................................................... 93
Note Edit ........................................................................................................... 94
Drum Edit .......................................................................................................... 95
Copy and paste the recorded data.................................................................... 97
Changing the note position etc. of the recorded data ..................................... 101
SD Audio Synchro (KN2600) .......................................................................... 103
Part V Composer ................................................................................................ 104
Outline of the Composer ................................................................................. 104
Simple recording method ................................................................................ 106
Create a completely new rhythm .................................................................... 106
Chord Modify Change ..................................................................................... 109
Part Setting ..................................................................................................... 110
Playback ......................................................................................................... 111
Step Record .................................................................................................... 111
Measure Edit................................................................................................... 112
Pattern Copy ................................................................................................... 115
Part VI Disk Drive (KN2400) ............................................................................ 117
Outline of the Disk Drive function.................................................................... 117
Outline of the procedure ................................................................................. 119
Loading data ................................................................................................... 120
Direct Play....................................................................................................... 122
Song Medley ................................................................................................... 124
Saving data ..................................................................................................... 125
Disk management ........................................................................................... 128
Set the automatic display when a disk is inserted .......................................... 130
Part VII SD Card (KN2600) ............................................................................... 131
Outline of the SD card..................................................................................... 131
Loading data ................................................................................................... 133
SD-Audio Play................................................................................................. 136
SD-Sound Play ............................................................................................... 137
Playlist............................................................................................................. 138
SD Song Medley ............................................................................................. 139
Saving Data .................................................................................................... 140
Create an album of your favorite songs .......................................................... 143
SD card management ..................................................................................... 144
Set the priority of displays............................................................................... 145
Part VIII Sound .................................................................................................... 146
Outline of the Sound ....................................................................................... 146
Part Setting ..................................................................................................... 147
Mixer ............................................................................................................... 150
Master Tuning ................................................................................................. 152
Key Scaling ..................................................................................................... 152
Sound Load Option ......................................................................................... 153
APC Reverb Setting........................................................................................ 154
Part IX Reverb & Effect ..................................................................................... 155
Outline of the Reverb & Effect ........................................................................ 155
8
QQTG0692
02_Contents.fm 9 ページ 2003年1月27日 月曜日 午後1時41分
Tone Control ................................................................................................... 156
Part X Sound Edit ............................................................................................... 157
Outline of the Sound Edit................................................................................ 157
Easy Edit......................................................................................................... 158
Tone Edit......................................................................................................... 159
Pitch Edit......................................................................................................... 162
Filter Edit......................................................................................................... 163
Amplitude Edit ................................................................................................. 165
LFO Edit .......................................................................................................... 167
Effect Edit........................................................................................................ 168
Controller Edit ................................................................................................. 169
Store the new sound ....................................................................................... 169
Part XI Control ..................................................................................................... 171
Outline of Control functions............................................................................. 171
Overall Touch Sensitivity ................................................................................ 172
Foot Controllers .............................................................................................. 172
Part XII Customize ............................................................................................. 174
Outline of Customize functions ....................................................................... 174
Display Time Out ............................................................................................ 175
Data Protection ............................................................................................... 176
MIDI Setting Load Option................................................................................ 176
Part XII MIDI ......................................................................................................... 177
What is MIDI? ................................................................................................. 177
Outline of MIDI functions................................................................................. 179
Part Setting ..................................................................................................... 180
Control Messages ........................................................................................... 181
Realtime Messages ........................................................................................ 181
Common Setting ............................................................................................. 182
Mode Setting................................................................................................... 183
Input/output Setting......................................................................................... 183
MIDI Presets ................................................................................................... 184
Computer Connection ..................................................................................... 185
Initialize...................................................................................................................... 186
About the performance data.................................................................................... 187
Separately sold options ........................................................................................... 187
Terminals................................................................................................................... 188
Symptoms which appear to be signs of trouble.................................................... 189
Error messages......................................................................................................... 191
Index .......................................................................................................................... 193
Specifications ........................................................................................................... 195
䡲 Supplied accessories
please check the supplied accessories.
□ Music stand
□ CD-ROM
□ AC cord
□ SD Card (KN2600)
9
QQTG0692
03_Controls and functions.fm 10 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午前11時27分
Controls and functions
(KN2400)
AUTO PLAY CHORD
Add an automatic accompaniment
to your selected rhythm.
(Refer to page 52.)
RHYTHM GROUP
Various rhythm patterns are
available for each rhythm group.
(Refer to page 49.)
MUSIC STYLIST
You can choose to have
all the settings of this
instrument automatically
set. (Refer to page 60.)
SOUND ARRANGER
SET
OFF/ON
AUTO PLAY CHORD
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
OFF/ON
CHORD FINDER
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
SIMPLE
BEAT
DANCE
CLUB
USA
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
TRAD &
WALTZ
MEMORY
LOAD
MUSIC STYLIST
OTHER
PARTS/TR
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
DEMO MAIN VOLUME
AUTO SETTING BANK
STOP
1
PERFORMANCE PADS
2
4
PITCH BEND
UP
MUTE
PROGRAM
IN
FADE
OUT
3
1
MIN
TEMPO/
MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER
MAX
POWER
OFF
ON
FAVORITES CONTRAST
VARIATION
2
3
4
FILL IN
1
2
6
5
SOLO
SEQUENCER
RESET
COUNT
INTRO
PERFORMANCE PADS
Add various phrases to your
performance with the pad
buttons. (Refer to page 67.)
DOWN
ONE TOUCH PLAY
Sounds and effects matching the selected rhythm
are automatically set. (Refer to page 60.)
PITCH BEND
The PITCH BEND wheel allows
a “sliding” change in the pitch.
(Refer to page 45.)
10
QQTG0692
FADE IN/OUT
Begin your song with a slowly
increasing volume, or end it by
having the sound slowly fade away.
(Refer to page 57.)
INTRO & ENDING
1
2
03_Controls and functions.fm 11 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午前11時27分
DISPLAY
Displays performance information, function
settings and other messages.
(Refer to page 30.)
• Use the CONTRAST buttons to adjust the
display so that it is easy to read.
EFFECT
Add various effects to the
sounds. (Refer to page 41.)
SOUND GROUP
Various sounds are available for
each sound group.
(Refer to page 36.)
TRANSPOSE
Raise or lower the key
of the entire keyboard.
(Refer to page 46.)
EFFECT
DIGITAL
MULTI
SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB
SOUND GROUP
PIANO
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
VOCAL
HARPSI ACCORDION
BRASS
SAX &
WOODWIND
MALLET &
SYNTH ORCH PERC
DRUM SOUND
KITS EXPLORER MEMORY
BASS
DIGITAL DRAWBAR
DISPLAY
HOLD
EXIT
HELP
PAGE
TRANSPOSE
–
+
SYNCHRO &
START/STOP
BREAK
1 2 3 4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
PART SELECT
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
TECHNICHORD
1
2
5
6
PANEL MEMORY
3
4
SET
SEQUENCER
PLAY EASY REC
PROGRAM
MENUS
BANK VIEW
7
CHORD STEP
REC
8
DISK
DISK IN USE
NEXT BANK
CONDUCTOR
TECHNI-CHORD
Block chords are
automatically added to the
melody. (Refer to page 47.)
CONDUCTOR
Assign a different sound to each
part, then assign the desired
parts to section of the keyboard.
(Refer to page 39.)
LOAD
SEQUENCER
Record and play back your
performance.
(Refer to page 73.)
PANEL MEMORY
Store the panel settings, then recall
them instantaneously just by pressing
a button or two. (Refer to page 64.)
11
QQTG0692
03_Controls and functions.fm 12 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午前11時27分
Controls and functions
(KN2600)
AUTO PLAY CHORD
Add an automatic accompaniment
to your selected rhythm.
(Refer to page 52.)
RHYTHM GROUP
Various rhythm patterns are
available for each rhythm
group. (Refer to page 49.)
MUSIC STYLIST
You can choose to have
all the settings of this
instrument automatically
set. (Refer to page 60.)
SOUND ARRANGER
SET
OFF/ON
AUTO PLAY CHORD
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
OFF/ON
CHORD FINDER
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
SIMPLE
BEAT
DANCE
CLUB
USA
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
TRAD &
WALTZ
MEMORY
LOAD
MUSIC STYLIST
OTHER
PARTS/TR
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
DEMO MAIN VOLUME
AUTO SETTING BANK
STOP/
RECORD
MAX
1
PERFORMANCE PADS
2
4
MIN
PITCH BEND
DOWN
PROGRAM
IN
FADE
OUT
3
VARIATION
2
3
4
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
2
6
5
SOLO
SEQUENCER
RESET
COUNT
INTRO
MAX
MIN
PITCH BEND/MODULATION
The PITCH BEND wheel allows
a “sliding” change in the pitch.
The MODULATION wheel is
used to add vibrato to the sound.
(Refer to page 45.)
QQTG0692
MUTE
MODULATION
UP
12
TEMPO/
MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER
1
POWER
OFF
ON
FAVORITES CONTRAST
PERFORMANCE PADS
Add various phrases to your
performance with the pad
buttons. (Refer to page 67.)
FADE IN/OUT
Begin your song with a slowly
increasing volume, or end it by
having the sound slowly fade
away. (Refer to page 57.)
03_Controls and functions.fm 13 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午前11時27分
DISPLAY
Displays performance information, function
settings and other messages.
(Refer to page 30.)
• Use the CONTRAST buttons to adjust the
display so that it is easy to read.
EFFECT
Add various effects to the
sounds. (Refer to page 41.)
SOUND GROUP
Various sounds are available for
each sound group.
(Refer to page 36.)
TRANSPOSE
Raise or lower the key
of the entire keyboard.
(Refer to page 46.)
EFFECT
DIGITAL
MULTI
SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB
SOUND GROUP
PIANO
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
VOCAL
HARPSI ACCORDION
BRASS
SAX &
WOODWIND
BASS
MALLET &
SYNTH ORCH PERC
DRUM SOUND
KITS EXPLORER MEMORY
DIGITAL DRAWBAR
DISPLAY
HOLD
EXIT
HELP
PAGE
PUSH
RELEASE
TRANSPOSE
–
+
SYNCHRO &
START/STOP
BREAK
1 2 3 4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
PART SELECT
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
TECHNICHORD
1
2
5
6
PANEL MEMORY
3
4
SET
SEQUENCER
PLAY EASY REC
PROGRAM
MENUS
BANK VIEW
7
CHORD STEP
REC
8
SD
SD IN USE
NEXT BANK
LOAD
CONDUCTOR
TECHNI-CHORD
Block chords are
automatically added to the
melody. (Refer to page 47.)
CONDUCTOR
Assign a different sound to each
part, then assign the desired
parts to section of the keyboard.
(Refer to page 39.)
SEQUENCER
Record and play back your
performance.
(Refer to page 73.)
PANEL MEMORY
Store the panel settings, then recall
them instantaneously just by pressing
a button or two. (Refer to page 64.)
13
QQTG0692
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 14 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分
Getting started
Before you play
AC IN
1
Plug the power cord into an outlet.
2
Affix the music stand as shown.
3
Press the POWER button to turn it on.
(Located on the left of the keyboard)
POWER
OFF
ON
• Headphones may be plugged into the
PHONES terminal. (Rear panel) This
will automatically switch off the
speaker system, and sound is heard
only through the headphones.
• The pitch of this instrument can be adjusted
for when playing with other instruments.
(Refer to page 152.)
• Under certain conditions, the functions and
memories of this instrument may be initialized
when the power is turned on.
14
QQTG0692
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 15 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分
Playing
EFFECT
SOUND ARRANGER
SET
OFF/ON
AUTO PLAY CHORD
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
DIGITAL
MULTI
SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB
OFF/ON
CHORD FINDER
SOUND GROUP
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
SIMPLE
BEAT
DANCE
CLUB
USA
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
VOCAL
HARPSI ACCORDION
PIANO
TRAD &
WALTZ
SAX &
WOODWIND
BRASS
MEMORY
BASS
MALLET &
SYNTH ORCH PERC
DRUM SOUND
KITS EXPLORER MEMORY
LOAD
MUSIC STYLIST
DIGITAL DRAWBAR
OTHER
PARTS/TR
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
DISPLAY
HOLD
LCD CONTRAST
<
>
MUTE
EXIT
HELP
PAGE
PUSH
RELEASE
DEMO MAIN VOLUME
AUTO SETTING BANK
STOP/
RECORD
MAX
1
PERFORMANCE PADS
2
TEMPO/
MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER
PROGRAM
IN
FADE
OUT
TRANSPOSE
Ð
3
1
VARIATION & MSA
2
3
4
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
2
+
SYNCHRO &
START/STOP
BREAK
1 2 3 4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
PART SELECT
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
TECHNICHORD
1
2
5
6
PANEL MEMORY
3
4
SET
SEQUENCER
PLAY EASY REC
PROGRAM
MENUS
BANK VIEW
7
CHORD STEP
REC
8
SD
SD IN USE
NEXT BANK
4
MIN
6
5
SOLO
SEQUENCER
RESET
POWER
OFF
ON
PITCH BEND
MAX
DOWN
MIN
4
In the CONDUCTOR section on the
panel, press the RIGHT 1 button to turn
it on.
LEFT
LOAD
CONDUCTOR
MODULATION
UP
5
1
COUNT
INTRO
RIGHT 2
3
12
3
Select a sound from the list of sounds
shown on the display.
RIGHT 1
CONDUCTOR
PAGE
2
In the SOUND GROUP section, press
one of the sound buttons.
• The list of sounds is contained on two
or more screen “pages”. To see a
different part of the list, press either
PAGE button.
SOUND GROUP
PIANO
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
VOCAL
HARPSI ACCORDION
BRASS
SAX &
WOODWIND
BASS
MALLET &
SYNTH ORCH PERC
4
Play the keyboard.
• Your Keyboard features Touch
Response. You control the volume by
playing the keys harder or softer.
5
Set the MAIN VOLUME to an
appropriate level with the sliding control.
DRUM SOUND
KITS EXPLORER MEMORY
• Refer to page 36 for detailed information
about selecting sounds.
15
QQTG0692
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 16 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分
See and listen to the
demonstration
EFFECT
SOUND ARRANGER
SET
OFF/ON
AUTO PLAY CHORD
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
DIGITAL
MULTI
SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB
OFF/ON
CHORD FINDER
SOUND GROUP
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
SIMPLE
BEAT
DANCE
CLUB
USA
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
VOCAL
HARPSI ACCORDION
PIANO
TRAD &
WALTZ
BRASS
MEMORY
BASS
SAX &
WOODWIND
MALLET &
SYNTH ORCH PERC
DRUM SOUND
KITS EXPLORER MEMORY
LOAD
MUSIC STYLIST
DIGITAL DRAWBAR
OTHER
PARTS/TR
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
DISPLAY
HOLD
LCD CONTRAST
<
>
MUTE
EXIT
HELP
PAGE
PUSH
RELEASE
DEMO MAIN VOLUME
AUTO SETTING BANK
STOP/
RECORD
MAX
1
PERFORMANCE PADS
2
TEMPO/
MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER
PROGRAM
IN
FADE
OUT
TRANSPOSE
Ð
3
1
VARIATION & MSA
2
3
4
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
2
+
SYNCHRO &
START/STOP
BREAK
1 2 3 4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
PART SELECT
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
TECHNICHORD
1
2
5
6
PANEL MEMORY
3
4
SET
SEQUENCER
PLAY EASY REC
PROGRAM
MENUS
BANK VIEW
7
CHORD STEP
REC
8
SD
SD IN USE
NEXT BANK
4
MIN
6
5
SOLO
POWER
OFF
ON
PITCH BEND
COUNT
INTRO
CONDUCTOR
MAX
DOWN
MIN
2
Press the DEMO button.
• The demonstration performance and
display corresponding to your
selection will begin.
• To end the demonstration before it has
finished, press the START/STOP
button.
DEMO
2
LOAD
MODULATION
UP
13
1
SEQUENCER
RESET
3
Use the buttons to the left and right the
display to select the demonstration tune
you wish to see and listen to.
When you are finished listening to the
demonstration tunes, press the DEMO
button again.
(KN2600)
• If you press and hold the DEMO button for a
few seconds, or if you press first the DEMO
button and then the START/STOP button, all
demo tunes are demonstrated in order in a
medley performance. The medley
16
QQTG0692
performance continues until the START/STOP
button or the DEMO button is pressed again.
• Some of the buttons do not function during the
DEMO mode.
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 17 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分
Add effects
EFFECT
SOUND ARRANGER
SET
OFF/ON
AUTO PLAY CHORD
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
DIGITAL
MULTI
SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB
OFF/ON
CHORD FINDER
SOUND GROUP
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
SIMPLE
BEAT
DANCE
CLUB
USA
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
VOCAL
HARPSI ACCORDION
PIANO
TRAD &
WALTZ
SAX &
WOODWIND
BRASS
MEMORY
BASS
MALLET &
SYNTH ORCH PERC
DRUM SOUND
KITS EXPLORER MEMORY
LOAD
MUSIC STYLIST
DIGITAL DRAWBAR
OTHER
PARTS/TR
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
DISPLAY
HOLD
LCD CONTRAST
<
>
MUTE
EXIT
HELP
PAGE
PUSH
RELEASE
DEMO MAIN VOLUME
AUTO SETTING BANK
STOP/
RECORD
MAX
1
PERFORMANCE PADS
2
TEMPO/
MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER
PROGRAM
IN
FADE
OUT
TRANSPOSE
Ð
3
1
VARIATION & MSA
2
3
4
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
2
START/STOP
1 2 3 4 BEAT
SYNCHRO &
BREAK
+
TAP TEMPO
PART SELECT
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
TECHNICHORD
1
2
5
6
PANEL MEMORY
3
4
SET
SEQUENCER
PLAY EASY REC
PROGRAM
MENUS
BANK VIEW
7
CHORD STEP
REC
8
SD
SD IN USE
NEXT BANK
4
MIN
6
5
SOLO
POWER
OFF
ON
PITCH BEND
SEQUENCER
RESET
COUNT
INTRO
LOAD
CONDUCTOR
MODULATION
UP
MAX
DOWN
MIN
ABC
Add breadth.
Add reverberation.
A
C
Press the CHORUS button to turn it on.
CHORUS
Press the REVERB button to turn it on.
REVERB
Add effect.
B
Press the MULTI EFFECT button to turn
it on.
MULTI
EFFECT
• You can modify the way in which the various
effects are applied. (Refer to page 42.)
17
QQTG0692
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 18 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分
Play back commercial song disks
(DIRECT PLAY) (KN2400)
EFFECT
SOUND ARRANGER
SET
OFF/ON
AUTO PLAY CHORD
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
DIGITAL
MULTI
SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB
OFF/ON
CHORD FINDER
SOUND GROUP
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
SIMPLE
BEAT
DANCE
CLUB
USA
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
VOCAL
HARPSI ACCORDION
PIANO
TRAD &
WALTZ
SAX &
WOODWIND
BRASS
MEMORY
BASS
MALLET &
SYNTH ORCH PERC
DRUM SOUND
KITS EXPLORER MEMORY
LOAD
MUSIC STYLIST
DIGITAL DRAWBAR
OTHER
PARTS/TR
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
DISPLAY
HOLD
LCD CONTRAST
<
>
MUTE
EXIT
HELP
PAGE
PUSH
RELEASE
DEMO MAIN VOLUME
AUTO SETTING BANK
STOP/
RECORD
MAX
1
PERFORMANCE PADS
2
TEMPO/
MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER
PROGRAM
IN
FADE
OUT
TRANSPOSE
Ð
3
1
VARIATION & MSA
2
3
4
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
2
+
SYNCHRO &
START/STOP
BREAK
1 2 3 4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
PART SELECT
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
TECHNICHORD
1
2
5
6
PANEL MEMORY
3
4
SET
SEQUENCER
PLAY EASY REC
PROGRAM
MENUS
BANK VIEW
7
CHORD STEP
REC
8
DISK
DISK IN USE
NEXT BANK
4
MIN
6
5
SOLO
POWER
OFF
ON
SEQUENCER
RESET
COUNT
INTRO
CONDUCTOR
LOAD
PITCH BEND
UP
DOWN
234
1
Insert the song disk into the Disk Drive
slot.
2
On the DISK MENU display, select
DIRECT PLAY.
3
• For SMF songs, use the PLAY AS
button to specify a sound arrangement
mode.
4
• DIRECT PLAY is possible from the following
disks:
Standard MIDI File
Standard MIDI File with Lyrics
DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION™ (DOC)
PianoDisc™
* All product and company names are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective owners.
* DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION is a trademark of
the YAMAHA Corporation.
18
QQTG0692
Use a the buttons below the display to
select a song.
Press the START button.
• The selected song is played back.
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 19 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分
Play back SD cards
(SD-AUDIO PLAY) (KN2600)
EFFECT
SOUND ARRANGER
SET
OFF/ON
AUTO PLAY CHORD
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
DIGITAL
MULTI
SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB
OFF/ON
CHORD FINDER
SOUND GROUP
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
SIMPLE
BEAT
DANCE
CLUB
USA
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
VOCAL
HARPSI ACCORDION
PIANO
TRAD &
WALTZ
SAX &
WOODWIND
BRASS
MEMORY
BASS
MALLET &
SYNTH ORCH PERC
DRUM SOUND
KITS EXPLORER MEMORY
LOAD
MUSIC STYLIST
DIGITAL DRAWBAR
OTHER
PARTS/TR
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
DISPLAY
HOLD
LCD CONTRAST
<
>
MUTE
EXIT
HELP
PAGE
PUSH
RELEASE
DEMO MAIN VOLUME
AUTO SETTING BANK
STOP/
RECORD
MAX
1
PERFORMANCE PADS
2
TEMPO/
MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER
PROGRAM
IN
FADE
OUT
TRANSPOSE
Ð
3
1
VARIATION & MSA
2
3
4
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
2
START/STOP
1 2 3 4 BEAT
SYNCHRO &
BREAK
+
TAP TEMPO
PART SELECT
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
TECHNICHORD
1
2
5
6
PANEL MEMORY
3
4
SET
SEQUENCER
PLAY EASY REC
PROGRAM
MENUS
BANK VIEW
7
CHORD STEP
REC
8
SD
SD IN USE
NEXT BANK
4
MIN
6
5
SOLO
POWER
OFF
ON
PITCH BEND
SEQUENCER
RESET
COUNT
INTRO
CONDUCTOR
LOAD
MODULATION
UP
MAX
DOWN
MIN
56123 4
1
Open the lid of the SD slot.
4
Press the SD button to turn it on.
SD
SD IN USE
LOAD
• Open it completely.
2
Insert an SD card with the stored songs
into the SD slot.
5
On the SD MENU display, select SDAUDIO PLAY.
6
Press the Playback button.
• Push the card until it locks.
3
Close the lid.
• Playback of the first song begins.
• No operation is possible when the lid
is open.
19
QQTG0692
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 20 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分
Select the registration for a
music style (MUSIC STYLIST)
EFFECT
SOUND ARRANGER
SET
OFF/ON
AUTO PLAY CHORD
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
DIGITAL
MULTI
SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB
OFF/ON
CHORD FINDER
SOUND GROUP
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
SIMPLE
BEAT
DANCE
CLUB
USA
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
VOCAL
HARPSI ACCORDION
PIANO
TRAD &
WALTZ
SAX &
WOODWIND
BRASS
MEMORY
BASS
MALLET &
SYNTH ORCH PERC
DRUM SOUND
KITS EXPLORER MEMORY
LOAD
MUSIC STYLIST
DIGITAL DRAWBAR
OTHER
PARTS/TR
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
DISPLAY
HOLD
LCD CONTRAST
<
>
MUTE
EXIT
HELP
PAGE
PUSH
RELEASE
DEMO MAIN VOLUME
AUTO SETTING BANK
STOP/
RECORD
MAX
1
PERFORMANCE PADS
2
TEMPO/
MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER
PROGRAM
IN
FADE
OUT
TRANSPOSE
Ð
3
1
VARIATION & MSA
2
3
4
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
2
+
SYNCHRO &
START/STOP
BREAK
1 2 3 4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
PART SELECT
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
TECHNICHORD
1
2
5
6
PANEL MEMORY
3
4
SET
PITCH BEND
1
20
QQTG0692
PROGRAM
MENUS
CHORD STEP
REC
8
SD
SD IN USE
6
5
SOLO
SEQUENCER
RESET
COUNT
INTRO
CONDUCTOR
LOAD
MODULATION
UP
MAX
DOWN
MIN
1
23
Press the MUSIC STYLIST button to
turn it on.
3
MUSIC STYLIST
2
SEQUENCER
PLAY EASY REC
BANK VIEW
7
NEXT BANK
4
MIN
POWER
OFF
ON
Select MUSICAL CATEGORY.
Use the CATEGORY ▲ and ▼ buttons
to select a category.
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 21 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分
EFFECT
SOUND ARRANGER
SET
OFF/ON
AUTO PLAY CHORD
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
DIGITAL
MULTI
SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB
OFF/ON
CHORD FINDER
SOUND GROUP
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
SIMPLE
BEAT
DANCE
CLUB
USA
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
VOCAL
HARPSI ACCORDION
PIANO
TRAD &
WALTZ
SAX &
WOODWIND
BRASS
MEMORY
BASS
MALLET &
SYNTH ORCH PERC
DRUM SOUND
KITS EXPLORER MEMORY
LOAD
MUSIC STYLIST
DIGITAL DRAWBAR
OTHER
PARTS/TR
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
DISPLAY
HOLD
LCD CONTRAST
<
>
MUTE
EXIT
HELP
PAGE
PUSH
RELEASE
DEMO MAIN VOLUME
AUTO SETTING BANK
STOP/
RECORD
MAX
1
PERFORMANCE PADS
2
TEMPO/
MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER
PROGRAM
IN
FADE
OUT
TRANSPOSE
Ð
3
1
VARIATION & MSA
2
3
4
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
2
+
SYNCHRO &
START/STOP
BREAK
1 2 3 4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
PART SELECT
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
TECHNICHORD
1
2
5
6
PANEL MEMORY
3
4
SET
SEQUENCER
PLAY EASY REC
PROGRAM
MENUS
BANK VIEW
7
CHORD STEP
REC
8
SD
SD IN USE
NEXT BANK
4
MIN
6
5
SOLO
SEQUENCER
RESET
POWER
OFF
ON
PITCH BEND
CONDUCTOR
LOAD
MODULATION
UP
MAX
DOWN
MIN
5
4
COUNT
INTRO
4
Use the STYLE ▲ and ▼ buttons to
select a music style.
• You can use the SKIP ∧ and ∨
buttons to skip to the previous or
following sub category.
• When you select a style, the sounds
and rhythm which are best suited for
the selected style are automatically
selected.
5
Play the keyboard.
• When you specify a chord, an intro is
played, after which the automatic
rhythm starts.
• You can also search for a style alphabetically
or by music era. (Refer to page 61.)
21
QQTG0692
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 22 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分
Automatic panel settings
(ONE TOUCH PLAY)
EFFECT
SOUND ARRANGER
SET
OFF/ON
AUTO PLAY CHORD
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
DIGITAL
MULTI
SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB
OFF/ON
CHORD FINDER
SOUND GROUP
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
SIMPLE
BEAT
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
PIANO
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
VOCAL
HARPSI ACCORDION
DANCE
CLUB
TRAD &
WALTZ
BRASS
SAX &
WOODWIND
MEMORY
BASS
USA
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
MALLET &
SYNTH ORCH PERC
DRUM SOUND
KITS EXPLORER MEMORY
LOAD
MUSIC STYLIST
DIGITAL DRAWBAR
OTHER
PARTS/TR
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
DISPLAY
HOLD
LCD CONTRAST
<
>
MUTE
EXIT
HELP
PAGE
PUSH
RELEASE
DEMO MAIN VOLUME
AUTO SETTING BANK
STOP/
RECORD
MAX
1
PERFORMANCE PADS
2
TEMPO/
MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER
PROGRAM
IN
FADE
OUT
TRANSPOSE
Ð
3
1
VARIATION & MSA
2
3
FILL IN
1
2
4
INTRO & ENDING
1
2
+
SYNCHRO &
START/STOP
BREAK
1 2 3 4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
PART SELECT
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
TECHNICHORD
1
2
5
6
PANEL MEMORY
3
4
SET
SEQUENCER
PLAY EASY REC
PROGRAM
MENUS
BANK VIEW
7
CHORD STEP
REC
8
SD
SD IN USE
NEXT BANK
4
MIN
6
5
SOLO
SEQUENCER
RESET
POWER
OFF
ON
PITCH BEND
CONDUCTOR
LOAD
MODULATION
UP
MAX
DOWN
MIN
34 6
1
COUNT
INTRO
1 25
In the RHYTHM GROUP section, press
the button for a desired rhythm.
4
Press the AUTO PLAY CHORD’s
MODE button to turn it on.
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
SIMPLE
BEAT
DANCE
CLUB
OFF/ON
CHORD FINDER
MEMORY
LOAD
• Do not select the MEMORY button.
3
MODE
TRAD &
WALTZ
USA
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
2
AUTO PLAY CHORD
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
5
Select BASIC on the display.
6
Press and hold the ONE TOUCH PLAY
button for a few seconds.
Select a rhythm from the list of rhythms
on the display.
Press the AUTO PLAY CHORD’s
OFF/ON button to turn it on..
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MODE
CHORD FINDER
22
QQTG0692
OFF/ON
• The sound, effects and tempo suitable
for the selected rhythm are
automatically selected. The tempo can
be adjusted with the
TEMPO/PROGRAM.
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 23 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分
EFFECT
SOUND ARRANGER
SET
OFF/ON
AUTO PLAY CHORD
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
DIGITAL
MULTI
SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB
OFF/ON
CHORD FINDER
SOUND GROUP
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
SIMPLE
BEAT
DANCE
CLUB
USA
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
VOCAL
HARPSI ACCORDION
PIANO
TRAD &
WALTZ
BRASS
MEMORY
BASS
SAX &
WOODWIND
MALLET &
SYNTH ORCH PERC
DRUM SOUND
KITS EXPLORER MEMORY
LOAD
MUSIC STYLIST
DIGITAL DRAWBAR
OTHER
PARTS/TR
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
DISPLAY
HOLD
LCD CONTRAST
<
>
MUTE
EXIT
HELP
PAGE
PUSH
RELEASE
DEMO MAIN VOLUME
AUTO SETTING BANK
STOP/
RECORD
MAX
1
PERFORMANCE PADS
2
TEMPO/
MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER
PROGRAM
IN
FADE
OUT
TRANSPOSE
Ð
3
1
VARIATION & MSA
2
3
4
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
2
+
SYNCHRO &
START/STOP
BREAK
1 2 3 4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
PART SELECT
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
TECHNICHORD
1
2
5
6
PANEL MEMORY
3
4
SET
SEQUENCER
PLAY EASY REC
PROGRAM
MENUS
BANK VIEW
7
CHORD STEP
REC
8
SD
SD IN USE
NEXT BANK
4
MIN
6
5
SOLO
SEQUENCER
RESET
POWER
OFF
ON
PITCH BEND
CONDUCTOR
LOAD
MODULATION
UP
MAX
DOWN
MIN
7
7
COUNT
INTRO
8
C
F
G7
C
C
F
G7
C
8
Use your left hand to play the chords
and your right hand to play the melody.
• Pressing a key on the left area of the
keyboard will cause the automatic
rhythm pattern to start playing
(synchro start).
At the end of your performance, press
the INTRO & ENDING 1 or 2 button.
INTRO & ENDING
1
2
• An ending pattern is played, after
which the automatic accompaniment
stops.
• If the START/STOP button is pressed,
the accompaniment stops
immediately.
C
• In this example you played chords by pressing
the keys for the “root notes” (ONE FINGER
chords). But you can also specify the chord by
playing all the notes in the chord. (Refer to
page 52.)
G7
F
• You can insert a fill-in pattern while the rhythm
pattern is playing by pressing either the FILL
IN 1 or FILL IN 2 button.
23
QQTG0692
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 24 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分
Store your panel settings
(PANEL MEMORY)
EFFECT
SOUND ARRANGER
SET
OFF/ON
AUTO PLAY CHORD
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
DIGITAL
MULTI
SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB
OFF/ON
CHORD FINDER
SOUND GROUP
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
SIMPLE
BEAT
DANCE
CLUB
USA
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
VOCAL
HARPSI ACCORDION
PIANO
TRAD &
WALTZ
BRASS
MEMORY
BASS
SAX &
WOODWIND
MALLET &
SYNTH ORCH PERC
DRUM SOUND
KITS EXPLORER MEMORY
LOAD
MUSIC STYLIST
DIGITAL DRAWBAR
OTHER
PARTS/TR
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
DISPLAY
HOLD
LCD CONTRAST
<
>
MUTE
EXIT
HELP
PAGE
PUSH
RELEASE
DEMO MAIN VOLUME
AUTO SETTING BANK
STOP/
RECORD
MAX
1
PERFORMANCE PADS
2
TEMPO/
MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER
PROGRAM
IN
FADE
OUT
TRANSPOSE
Ð
3
1
VARIATION & MSA
2
3
FILL IN
1
2
4
INTRO & ENDING
1
2
+
SYNCHRO &
START/STOP
BREAK
1 2 3 4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
PART SELECT
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
TECHNICHORD
1
2
5
6
PANEL MEMORY
3
4
SET
SEQUENCER
PLAY EASY REC
PROGRAM
MENUS
BANK VIEW
7
CHORD STEP
REC
8
SD
SD IN USE
NEXT BANK
4
MIN
6
5
SOLO
POWER
OFF
ON
PITCH BEND
SEQUENCER
RESET
COUNT
INTRO
LOAD
CONDUCTOR
MODULATION
UP
MAX
DOWN
MIN
23
1
Set up the desired panel settings
(sounds, volumes, etc.)
2
Use the NEXT BANK button to select a
bank (A, B, C).
3
With the SET button held down, press
one of the numbered buttons of the
PANEL MEMORY (1 to 8).
1
2
PANEL MEMORY
3
4
NEXT BANK
SET
BANK VIEW
5
6
7
8
NEXT BANK
• The bank numbers are shown on the
display.
Bank number
• If you do not wish to recall the rhythm, tempo,
etc. with the PANEL MEMORY, press and
hold the SET button for a few seconds to show
the PANEL MEMORY MODE display, and
select NORMAL.
24
QQTG0692
• The current panel settings are now
stored in the specified bank and
number. When you select the same
bank and number again, the stored
panel settings are recalled.
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 25 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分
Record your performance
(SEQUENCER)
EFFECT
SOUND ARRANGER
SET
OFF/ON
AUTO PLAY CHORD
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
DIGITAL
MULTI
SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB
OFF/ON
CHORD FINDER
SOUND GROUP
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
SIMPLE
BEAT
DANCE
CLUB
USA
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
VOCAL
HARPSI ACCORDION
PIANO
TRAD &
WALTZ
SAX &
WOODWIND
BRASS
MEMORY
BASS
MALLET &
SYNTH ORCH PERC
DRUM SOUND
KITS EXPLORER MEMORY
LOAD
MUSIC STYLIST
DIGITAL DRAWBAR
OTHER
PARTS/TR
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
DISPLAY
HOLD
LCD CONTRAST
<
>
MUTE
EXIT
HELP
PAGE
PUSH
RELEASE
DEMO MAIN VOLUME
AUTO SETTING BANK
STOP/
RECORD
MAX
1
PERFORMANCE PADS
2
TEMPO/
MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER
PROGRAM
IN
FADE
OUT
TRANSPOSE
Ð
3
1
VARIATION & MSA
2
3
4
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
2
START/STOP
1 2 3 4 BEAT
SYNCHRO &
BREAK
+
TAP TEMPO
PART SELECT
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
TECHNICHORD
1
2
5
6
PANEL MEMORY
3
4
SET
PITCH BEND
SEQUENCER
PLAY EASY REC
PROGRAM
MENUS
BANK VIEW
7
CHORD STEP
REC
8
NEXT BANK
4
MIN
SD
SD
SD IN USE
6
5
SOLO
POWER
OFF
ON
SEQUENCER
RESET
COUNT
INTRO
LOAD
CONDUCTOR
MODULATION
UP
MAX
DOWN
MIN
2
1
Sonatina
Sound: Piano (RIGHT 1 part)
Right hand
Left hand
1
In the SEQUENCER section, press the
EASY REC button to turn it on.
2
Press the OK button.
SEQUENCER
PLAY EASY REC
• The display changes to the
REALTIME RECORD display.
(Continued on the next page)
25
QQTG0692
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 26 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分
EFFECT
SOUND ARRANGER
SET
OFF/ON
AUTO PLAY CHORD
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
DIGITAL
MULTI
SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB
OFF/ON
CHORD FINDER
SOUND GROUP
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
SIMPLE
BEAT
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
PIANO
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
VOCAL
HARPSI ACCORDION
DANCE
CLUB
TRAD &
WALTZ
BRASS
SAX &
WOODWIND
MEMORY
BASS
USA
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
MALLET &
SYNTH ORCH PERC
DRUM SOUND
KITS EXPLORER MEMORY
LOAD
MUSIC STYLIST
DIGITAL DRAWBAR
OTHER
PARTS/TR
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
DISPLAY
HOLD
LCD CONTRAST
<
>
MUTE
EXIT
HELP
PAGE
PUSH
RELEASE
DEMO MAIN VOLUME
AUTO SETTING BANK
STOP/
RECORD
MAX
1
PERFORMANCE PADS
2
TEMPO/
MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER
PROGRAM
IN
FADE
OUT
TRANSPOSE
Ð
3
1
VARIATION & MSA
2
3
FILL IN
1
2
4
INTRO & ENDING
1
2
+
SYNCHRO &
START/STOP
BREAK
1 2 3 4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
PART SELECT
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
TECHNICHORD
1
2
5
6
PANEL MEMORY
3
4
SET
SEQUENCER
PLAY EASY REC
PROGRAM
MENUS
BANK VIEW
7
CHORD STEP
REC
8
SD
SD IN USE
NEXT BANK
4
MIN
6
5
SOLO
SEQUENCER
RESET
POWER
OFF
ON
PITCH BEND
COUNT
INTRO
CONDUCTOR
LOAD
MODULATION
UP
MAX
DOWN
MIN
3
A B
3
Play the song on the keyboard.
4
When you have finished playing, press
the EASY REC button again to turn it off.
4
Playing back your recorded
performance
A
Press the SEQUENCER RESET (FILL
IN 1) button.
FILL IN
1
SEQUENCER
PLAY EASY REC
SEQUENCER
RESET
• The PLAY button in the
SEQUENCER section turns on.
B
Press the START/STOP button.
START/STOP
1 2 3 4 BEAT
• Your performance is played back just
as you recorded it.
• When you are finished playing back
your performance, press the PLAY
button in the SEQUENCER section to
turn it off.
26
QQTG0692
Save data on an SD card
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 27 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分
(KN2600)
EFFECT
SOUND ARRANGER
SET
OFF/ON
AUTO PLAY CHORD
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
DIGITAL
MULTI
SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB
OFF/ON
CHORD FINDER
SOUND GROUP
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
SIMPLE
BEAT
DANCE
CLUB
USA
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
VOCAL
HARPSI ACCORDION
PIANO
TRAD &
WALTZ
BRASS
MEMORY
BASS
SAX &
WOODWIND
MALLET &
SYNTH ORCH PERC
DRUM SOUND
KITS EXPLORER MEMORY
LOAD
MUSIC STYLIST
DIGITAL DRAWBAR
OTHER
PARTS/TR
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
DISPLAY
HOLD
LCD CONTRAST
<
>
MUTE
EXIT
HELP
PAGE
PUSH
RELEASE
DEMO MAIN VOLUME
AUTO SETTING BANK
STOP/
RECORD
MAX
1
PERFORMANCE PADS
2
TEMPO/
MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER
PROGRAM
IN
FADE
OUT
TRANSPOSE
Ð
3
1
VARIATION & MSA
2
3
4
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
2
+
SYNCHRO &
START/STOP
BREAK
1 2 3 4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
PART SELECT
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
TECHNICHORD
1
2
5
6
PANEL MEMORY
3
4
SET
SEQUENCER
PLAY EASY REC
PROGRAM
MENUS
BANK VIEW
7
CHORD STEP
REC
8
SD
SD IN USE
NEXT BANK
4
MIN
6
5
SOLO
POWER
OFF
ON
PITCH BEND
SEQUENCER
RESET
COUNT
INTRO
CONDUCTOR
MODULATION
UP
MAX
DOWN
MIN
3456
1
2
LOAD
2
Insert an SD card you wish to save to
into the SD slot. (Refer to page 19)
4
Select TECHNICS FORMAT.
• Close the cover securely.
5
Specify the FOLDER and a SONG
number to save to.
6
Press the SAVE button.
Press the SD button.
SD
SD IN USE
LOAD
3
On the SD MENU display, select SAVE.
• The performance data of the song
recorded in the SEQUENCER is
saved on the SD card.
27
QQTG0692
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 28 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分
EFFECT
SOUND ARRANGER
SET
OFF/ON
AUTO PLAY CHORD
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
DIGITAL
MULTI
SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB
OFF/ON
CHORD FINDER
SOUND GROUP
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
SIMPLE
BEAT
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
PIANO
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
VOCAL
HARPSI ACCORDION
DANCE
CLUB
TRAD &
WALTZ
BRASS
SAX &
WOODWIND
MEMORY
BASS
USA
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
MALLET &
SYNTH ORCH PERC
DRUM SOUND
KITS EXPLORER MEMORY
LOAD
MUSIC STYLIST
DIGITAL DRAWBAR
OTHER
PARTS/TR
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
DISPLAY
HOLD
LCD CONTRAST
<
>
MUTE
EXIT
HELP
PAGE
PUSH
RELEASE
DEMO MAIN VOLUME
AUTO SETTING BANK
STOP/
RECORD
MAX
1
PERFORMANCE PADS
2
TEMPO/
MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER
PROGRAM
IN
FADE
OUT
TRANSPOSE
Ð
3
1
VARIATION & MSA
2
3
4
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
2
+
SYNCHRO &
START/STOP
BREAK
1 2 3 4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
PART SELECT
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
TECHNICHORD
1
2
5
6
PANEL MEMORY
3
4
SET
SEQUENCER
PLAY EASY REC
PROGRAM
MENUS
BANK VIEW
7
CHORD STEP
REC
8
SD
SD IN USE
NEXT BANK
4
MIN
6
5
SOLO
SEQUENCER
RESET
POWER
OFF
ON
PITCH BEND
COUNT
INTRO
CONDUCTOR
LOAD
MODULATION
UP
MAX
DOWN
MIN
23 5
1 4
Recall data from an SD card
1
Press and hold the SD button for a few
seconds.
SD
3
Press the LOAD button.
• The data is copied to the internal
memory of this instrument.
4
Press the PLAY button in the
SEQUENCER section to turn it on.
SD IN USE
LOAD
SEQUENCER
PLAY EASY REC
2
Select the FOLDER and the SONG you
wish to load.
5
Press the START/STOP button.
START/STOP
1 2 3 4 BEAT
• The recalled song is played back.
■ The following data can be saved/loaded:
PERFORMANCE
BACKUP
CURRENT PANEL (The current panel settings)
PANEL MEMORY
SEQUENCER
COMPOSER (MEMORY contents)
SOUND MEMORY
PERFORMANCE PADS (USER memories)
EFFECT MEMORY
MIDI (USER memories for the MIDI PRESETS) & FAVORITES
• KN2400: The data can be saved in the disk.
(Refer to page 125.)
28
QQTG0692
Load rhythm data from a Technics
pattern disk (COMPOSER LOAD) (KN2400)
EFFECT
SOUND ARRANGER
SET
OFF/ON
AUTO PLAY CHORD
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
DIGITAL
MULTI
SUSTAIN EFFECT CHORUS EFFECT REVERB
OFF/ON
CHORD FINDER
SOUND GROUP
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
PIANO
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
VOCAL
HARPSI ACCORDION
TRAD &
WALTZ
BRASS
SAX &
WOODWIND
MEMORY
BASS
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
SIMPLE
BEAT
DANCE
CLUB
USA
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
MALLET &
SYNTH ORCH PERC
DRUM SOUND
KITS EXPLORER MEMORY
LOAD
MUSIC STYLIST
DIGITAL DRAWBAR
OTHER
PARTS/TR
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
DISPLAY
HOLD
LCD CONTRAST
<
>
MUTE
EXIT
HELP
PAGE
PUSH
RELEASE
DEMO MAIN VOLUME
AUTO SETTING BANK
STOP/
RECORD
MAX
1
PERFORMANCE PADS
2
TEMPO/
MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER
PROGRAM
IN
FADE
OUT
TRANSPOSE
Ð
3
1
VARIATION & MSA
2
3
FILL IN
1
2
4
INTRO & ENDING
1
2
+
SYNCHRO &
START/STOP
BREAK
1 2 3 4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
PART SELECT
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
TECHNICHORD
1
2
5
6
PANEL MEMORY
3
4
SET
SEQUENCER
PLAY EASY REC
PROGRAM
MENUS
BANK VIEW
7
CHORD STEP
REC
8
SD
SD IN USE
NEXT BANK
4
MIN
6
5
SOLO
SEQUENCER
RESET
POWER
OFF
ON
PITCH BEND
COUNT
INTRO
CONDUCTOR
LOAD
MODULATION
UP
MAX
DOWN
MIN
2
1
Insert a commercially sold Technics
pattern disk into the Disk Drive slot.
2
In the RHYTHM GROUP section, press
and hold the LOAD (MEMORY) button
for a few seconds.
34
4
Press the LOAD button.
RHYTHM GROUP
POP
SIMPLE
BEAT
ROCK DANCE POP BALLAD
DANCE
CLUB
USA
JAZZ & BALLROOM LATIN &
SWING & SHOW WORLD
TRAD &
WALTZ
MEMORY
• Rhythm data is loaded to the
COMPOSER memory (MEMORY).
You can use the rhythms during your
performance, just like the preset
rhythms.
LOAD
3
Select the name of the pattern to load.
29
QQTG0692
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 29 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時31分
05_About the display.fm
30 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後12時10分
About the display
About the display
A large-size display, easy to operate with excellent readability, is used for displaying various information
such as the names of the selected sounds and rhythms etc. and when setting the functions. Let’s take a
look.
• The display illustrations shown in this User’s Manual are examples for the sake of clarification; the
actual displays on your instrument may differ from the illustrations.
Normal display (HOME PAGE)
This is the kind of information you see on the display during a normal performance.
Selected rhythm
RIGHT 1 part sound
Tempo
RIGHT 2 part sound
LEFT part sound
Volume of each part
Volume balance
At the bottom half of the normal display, the volume balance of each part is represented in a
fader illustration and by a number (0 to 127). You
can use the balance buttons below the display to
adjust the volumes.
OTHER
PARTS/TR
MUTE
APC: AUTO PLAY CHORD
METR: METRONOME
PADS: PERFORMANCE PADS
When setting the volume balance, press the
upper button to increase the volume and the
lower button to decrease it.
• Hold a button down to scroll the volume
quickly.
䡲 MUSIC
“MUSIC” pertains to the SEQUENCER’s volume.
• Affects the sound of all parts except the keys.
• KN2600: does not affect SD-AUDIO data playback.
<Auto accompaniment part>
Pressing the OTHER PARTS/TR button will display the auto accompaniment part setting
screen.
• DRM: DRUMS ACP: ACCOMP
䡲 MUTE
To mute a part, press both the corresponding
upper and lower buttons at the same time.
• The volume display for a muted part is shown
as “MUTE.”
• Pressing either balance button for a muted
part will cancel the mute function.
30
QQTG0692
31 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後12時10分
䡲 OTHER PARTS/TR
By the pressing the OTHER PARTS/TR button,
the screen sequentially switches to the respective volume balance screens of the play part,
auto accompaniment part, playback part (1 to 8),
and playback part (9 to 16). The playback part
(PT) is used to playback recording and song
data.
PAGE
Menu display
When there are additional parts to the current
display, a page number indication, for example
PAGE1/2, appears in the upper right corner of
the screen. For example, 1/2 indicates that there
are two pages of the display, and the current
page is page 1. In this case, you can use the
upper and lower PAGE buttons, to the right of
the balance buttons, to view different “pages” of
the display.
The PROGRAM MENUS button controls multiple
functions. Press the button to access its menu
display.
PAGE
• When there are other parts or tracks to
access, the OTHER PARTS/TR indicator is lit.
PROGRAM
MENUS
䡲 Example of menu display: PROGRAM
MENUS
Select a function from the menu display by
pressing the corresponding button to the left or
right of the display indicated by the 䊴 and 䊳
arrows.
• Press the upper button to view the next page
of the display, and the lower button to view the
previous page of the display.
• On the last page of the display, pressing the
upper button returns to the first page. And
conversely, on the first page of the display,
pressing the lower button will skip to the last
page.
• In this manual, the steps describing how to
select a function from a menu display are generally abbreviated as follows, for example: “On
the PROGRAM MENUS display, select
SOUND.”
31
QQTG0692
About the dispoay
05_About the display.fm
05_About the display.fm
32 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後12時10分
Setting display
EXIT
When you select an item from the menu display,
the setting display for the item is shown.
The buttons to the right, left and/or directly below
the display are used to select and adjust the settings.
While the setting display is shown, press this button to go back to the previous display.
DISPLAY
HOLD
EXIT
HELP
About the display
䡲 Example of setting display: MASTER
TUNING
DISPLAY HOLD
Press this button to turn it on when you wish to
maintain the current display. You can keep a display which is normally automatically canceled,
for example, or even during a performance, you
can monitor information which is not shown on
the normal display.
Press the button corresponding to the ∧ or ∨ button on the display to change the value.
• In this manual, this procedure is written as follows: “Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the
pitch.”
TEMPO/PROGRAM
If the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit while
you are using the display to adjust the setting, it
indicates that these buttons can be used to
quickly change the displayed value or setting.
TEMPO/
DISPLAY
HOLD
EXIT
HELP
• The indicator for this button may flash if the
current display is one which is normally automatically canceled.
• If the PROGRAM MENUS button, for example, is pressed, the DISPLAY HOLD mode is
canceled.
PROGRAM
CONTRAST
Press the CONTRAST button and adjust the display's viewability using the ∧ and ∨ buttons on
the screen.
• The setting which can be adjusted is highlighted on the display.
CONTRAST
• When adjusting the CONTRAST, the set value
is shown shortly on the display.
32
QQTG0692
33 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後12時10分
HELP
You can find an explanation of each button’s
function on the display.
EXIT
5. Press the HELP button again to exit the help
mode.
1. Press the HELP button.
DISPLAY
HOLD
• An explanation of the button’s function is
shown on the display.
HELP
• The following display appears.
• Attention display messages and error messages are also shown in the selected language.
• The appearance of the display on your instrument may be different from the illustrated display in this manual depending on the region in
which your instrument was purchased and the
selected display language.
2. Use the buttons below the display to select a
language.
3. Press the OK button.
4. Press a button on the panel whose explanation you wish to read.
Favorites
With up to 9 types of sounds, rhythms, functions, etc., you can arrange them to make up your own unique
screen pattern.
1. Press the FAVORITES button to turn it on.
• The display looks similar to the following.
FAVORITES
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Select the desired item.
• Use the CATEGORY ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a category, and then the ITEM ∧ and ∨ but-
2. Press the FAVORITES SETTING button.
tons to select an item.
• The MUTE KEYS function silences the sound
of the keyboard keys. This is convenient when
you wish to pretend to play the keyboard while
playing back a recorded performance.
• The PANIC function interrupts the sound, for
example, when it fails to cease during a MIDI
performance.
(Continued on the next page)
33
QQTG0692
About the dispoay
05_About the display.fm
05_About the display.fm
34 ページ 2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後12時10分
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create the display you
you wish to paste (put) the item.
• While the SET button is depressed, the display appears as shown below. Use the buttons to the left and right of the display to
specify where you wish to paste the item.
want.
• There are nine settable items on the display.
About the display
4. While pressing the SET button, specify where
䡲 Recall a FAVORITES display
1. Press the FAVORITES button to turn it on.
2. Use the buttons to the left and right of the display to specify the ITEM you wish to recall.
• The FAVORITES settings can be saved to a
disk/card.
34
QQTG0692
6. On the FAVORITES SETTINGS display,
press the OK button.
• Your customized display is stored.
06_Part I.fm 35 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分
Part I Sounds and effects
Overview of sounds and effects
NX SOUND
Part
NX SOUND is the Technics original sound generator format which evokes realtime performance quality and expressive power, and
dramatically expands the number of sounds
and effects generated. This format includes
GM2 (General MIDI Level 2), and make various
controls possible when data is created and
reproduced by computer.
This instrument is organized into the following
parts.
• For information about GM2, refer to page
118.
• Equipment with the logo shown below is
compatible with NX SOUND song data.
RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT:
These are the parts the performer plays on
the keyboard.
• These are independent from the playback
parts. For example one can to perform on the
keyboard while playing back a song disk with
16-part standard MIDI files (SMF).
PART1 to 16:
SMF song disk playback parts, or parts for
MIDI receive.
ACCOMP1 to 5, BASS, DRUMS 1, 2:
Parts for the automatic accompaniment.
PADS:
Parts for the PERFORMANCE PADS
35
QQTG0692
Sounds and effects
The following is an overview of the sound parts of this instrument.
06_Part I.fm 36 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分
Part I
Sounds and effects
Selecting sounds
Select the sounds for the three parts you can play on the keyboard—RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and LEFT. After
first selecting a part and a SOUND GROUP, choose the desired sound from the display.
Select a sound
1. In the PART SELECT section, choose RIGHT
Sounds and effects
1, RIGHT 2 or LEFT.
3. Select the desired sound from the list on the
display.
PART SELECT
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
• The CONDUCTOR buttons are used to specify which part is heard. (Refer to page 39.)
• For the RIGHT 1 and RIGHT 2 parts, when a
CONDUCTOR button is selected, the corresponding PART SELECT button is also activated.
2. In the SOUND GROUP section, select a
sound group.
SOUND GROUP
PIANO
STRINGS & GUITAR & ORGAN &
VOCAL
HARPSI ACCORDION
BRASS
SAX &
WOODWIND
BASS
MALLET &
SYNTH ORCH PERC
DRUM SOUND
KITS EXPLORER MEMORY
DIGITAL DRAWBAR
• The sounds in DRUM KITS are percussion
sounds that you play by striking the keyboard
keys.
• MEMORY is reserved for storing sounds you
modify. (Refer to page 170.)
36
QQTG0692
• When you select a sound, the optimum effects
for the sound are automatically applied.
You can also choose to cancel this automatic
feature. (Refer to page 153.)
• You can use the PAGE buttons to view a different page of the list.
• Use the OCTAVE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
the octave.
• The sound you select is memorized for the
part you selected in step 1.
• The sounds that can be selected for the
RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and LEFT parts and for
PART 1-16 vary.
• The illustrated display shows one example,
and the actual display may be different.
4. Play the keyboard.
• This instrument features INITIAL TOUCH (the
volume, for example, changes depending on
how hard the keyboard is played).
06_Part I.fm 37 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分
Part I
Sounds and effects
SOUND EXPLORER
This is a convenient feature for finding the sound
you want from the many available sounds.
3. Use the GRP ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a
1. In the PART SELECT section, choose RIGHT
4. Use the buttons on both side of the display to
2. Press the SOUND EXPLORER button to turn
it on..
SOUND
EXPLORER
select the sound.
• The numerical value that is displayed for each
sound is the MIDI [BANK MSB, LSB]-PROGRAM CHANGE number.
• GM2 sounds are selected on this display.
䡲 ALPHABET
Press the CTG button to show the sound names
in alphabetical order.
• Press the ALP button to return to the CATEGORY display.
Digital Drawbar
You can play organ sounds while controlling the drawbars on the display.
1. In the PART SELECT section, select a part.
2. Press the DIGITAL DRAWBAR button to turn
it on.
DIGITAL DRAWBAR
corresponding balance buttons to adjust the
volume.
• The DIGITAL DRAWBAR can not be selected
for the ACCOMP and BASS parts of the
COMPOSER, SOUND ARRANGER or PERFORMANCE PADS.
<DRAWBAR SETTING>
Press the DRAWBAR SETTING button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
(Continued on the next page)
3. Use the balance buttons below the display to
adjust the volume of each drawbar.
• The volume of each drawbar is illustrated on
the display and changes when you press the
37
QQTG0692
Sounds and effects
1, RIGHT 2 or LEFT.
GROUP of sound.
06_Part I.fm 38 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分
Part I
Sounds and effects
䡲 Change the sound type
Use the <Jazz Drawbars> / <Rock Drawbars>
button to select the type of sound.
䡲 Other settings
Use the buttons on either side of the display to
select a setting item, and use one of the ∧ and ∨
buttons, whichever is relevant for the selection,
and set.
䡲 PERCUSSIVE TONE
PERCUSSIVE TONE adds a tone with a fast initial attack to the drawbar sounds. You can select
two pitch levels of attack tones.
Sounds and effects
Use the PERCUSSIVE TONE 2 2/3’ and 4’ buttons to turn the respective tone on or off.
䡲 TREMOLO
Tremolo is a rapid oscillation in volume, like the
effect of a rotating speaker. The tremolo speed
can be changed while you are playing.
ATTACK TIME:
Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the time it
takes for the drawbar sound to sound after
a key is played.
RELEASE TIME:
Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the time it
takes for the drawbar sound to die out after
the keys are released.
DECAY:
Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the time it
takes for the percussive tone to die out.
LEVEL:
Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the volume of the percussive tone.
• The above settings are effective for the
RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and LEFT parts in common.
Use the TREMOLO button to switch between the
SLOW and FAST rotating speeds.
• The tremolo setting is effective for each part in
common.
• The TREMOLO is disabled if the MULTI
EFFECT button is turned ON.
About foot marks
The foot indication (for example 8’) refers to the pitch of a rank of pipes in a pipe organ. If 8’ is used as
the standard (the pitch as played on the keyboard), a 16’ rank pitch will be one octave below the 8’ rank
pitch, and a 4’ rank pitch one octave above.
When the C3 key is pressed, the sounds of the different pitch ranks are as follows.
c 2 d2 e2 f 2 g2 a2 b 2 c3 d3 e3 f3 g3 a3 b3 c 4 d4 e4 f 4 g4 a4 b 4 c 5 d5 e5 f 5 g5 a5 b 5 c6
16'
38
QQTG0692
8'
5 1/3 '
4'
2 2/3 '
2' 1 3/5 ' 1 1/3 '
1'
06_Part I.fm 39 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分
Part I
Sounds and effects
Assigning parts to
the keyboard
The CONDUCTOR buttons are used to assign the parts (RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT) to the keyboard in
many different ways. For example, you can split the keyboard into right and left sections (SPLIT), and
assign a different sound to each section.
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
How sounds are assigned to the keyboard
All keys produce the RIGHT 1 sound.
Sounds and effects
CONDUCTOR settings
RIGHT 1
CONDUCTOR
All keys produce the RIGHT 2 sound.
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
RIGHT 2
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
All keys produce both the RIGHT 1 sound and the RIGHT 2 sound.
RIGHT 1 + RIGHT 2
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
CONDUCTOR
The left keys produce the LEFT sound and the right keys produce the
RIGHT 1 sound and the RIGHT 2 sound.
LEFT
RIGHT 1 + RIGHT 2
The left keys produce the LEFT sound and the right keys produce the
RIGHT 1 sound.
LEFT
RIGHT 1
The left keys produce the LEFT sound and the right keys produce the
RIGHT 2 sound.
LEFT
RIGHT 2
• The volume for each part can be adjusted independently. (Refer to page 30.)
• The following conditions are in effect when the AUTO PLAY CHORD is used.
—BASIC, ADVANCED mode: You cannot assign sounds to all the keys.
—PIANIST mode: The keyboard cannot be split.
39
QQTG0692
06_Part I.fm 40 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分
Part I
Sounds and effects
SPLIT POINT
When the keyboard is split into left and right sections, the split point is usually C3.
C3
Sounds and effects
SPLIT
POINT
䡲 Customized split point
Use the following procedure if you wish to store a
split point at a location other than C3.
1. Press the SPLIT POINT button.
SPLIT
POINT
• The following display appears.
2. Press a key on the keyboard to specify the
desired split point.
• A split point is set at the location of the
pressed key, and is indicated on the keyboard
illustration on the display.
• The key at the split point is the lowest note of
the right keyboard section.
• After a few seconds, the display exits the setting mode.
40
QQTG0692
06_Part I.fm 41 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分
Part I
Sounds and effects
Effects
SUSTAIN
SUSTAIN is the gradual fading out of musical
tones after the key is released.
1. In the CONDUCTOR or PART SELECT secSounds and effects
tion, turn on the part to which this effect will be
applied.
2. Press the SUSTAIN button to turn it on.
SUSTAIN
• The SUSTAIN can be set to on or off for each
part.
• This effect does not work for the sounds in the
DRUM KITS sound group.
• This effect may not work for some sounds.
• In the initialized state, the sustain can be
turned on and off with the optional Foot Switch
(sold separately).
DIGITAL EFFECT
DIGITAL EFFECT gives the sound richness and
enhances your performance.
1. In the CONDUCTOR or PART SELECT section, turn on the part to which this effect will be
applied.
2. Press the DIGITAL EFFECT button to turn it
on.
DIGITAL
EFFECT
• The on or off status of the DIGITAL EFFECT
is preset for each sound.
• This effect does not work for the sounds in the
DRUM KITS sound groups.
• This effect may not work for some sounds.
41
QQTG0692
06_Part I.fm 42 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分
Part I
Sounds and effects
MULTI EFFECT
The MULTI EFFECT works like a studio effects
processor, providing effects such as CHORUS,
PHASER, DELAY and DISTORTION.
䡲 EFFECT EDIT
The effects can be edited and then stored in a
memory.
1. In the CONDUCTOR or PART SELECT sec-
1. Select an effect type to use as a base.
tion, turn on the part to which this effect will be
applied.
2. Press the EDIT button.
• The display changes to the following.
2. Press the MULTI EFFECT button to turn it on.
Sounds and effects
MULTI
EFFECT
䡲 Type and parameter settings
1. Press and hold the MULTI EFFECT button for
a few seconds.
• The display changes to the following.
3. Use the PARAMETER ▲ and ▼ buttons to
select the parameter.
4. Use the VALUE ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the
setting.
• The parameters vary depending on the effect
type selected as the base.
• (V) is the abbreviation of VARIATION.
5. Press the WRITE button.
2. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select an effect
group.
• The EFFECT MEMORY is for edited effects
(see below).
3. Use the buttons to the right of the display to
select the type.
• If the types comprise more than one display
“page,” use the PAGE buttons to switch
pages.
6. Press the EFFECT NAMING button and
assign a name to the effect, if necessary.
• Refer to page 65 for details about the
NAMING procedure.
• Press the VARI button to enable the variation
effect.
7. Use the EFFECT MEMORY ▲ and ▼ buttons
• This display can also be accessed from the
REVERB & EFFECT MENU display. (Refer to
page 155.)
8. Press the OK button.
42
QQTG0692
to specify the location in which to store the
edited effect.
06_Part I.fm 43 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分
Part I
Sounds and effects
REVERB
CHORUS
REVERB applies a reverberation effect to the
sound.
Add breadth to the sound.
Press the CHORUS button to turn it on.
Press the REVERB button to turn it on.
CHORUS
䡲 Type and parameter settings
䡲 Type and parameter settings
1. Press and hold the REVERB button for a few
1. Press and hold the CHORUS button for a few
seconds.
• The display changes to the following.
seconds.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select an effect
2. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the name
group.
• The EFFECT MEMORY is an edited effect
group.
of the effect group.
• EFFECT MEMORY is an edited effect group.
3. Use the buttons to the right of the display to
3. Use the buttons to the right of the display to
select a type.
• If the types comprise more than one display
“page,” use the PAGE buttons to switch
pages.
4. Use the TOTAL DEPTH ∧ and ∨ buttons to
select a type.
䡲 EFFECT EDIT
Your edited effect can be stored in a memory for
later recall.
• The procedure is the same as for MULTI
EFFECT. (Refer to page 42.)
set the depth of the effect.
• This display can also be accessed from the
REVERB & EFFECT MENU display. (Refer to
page 155.)
䡲 EFFECT EDIT
Your edited effect can be stored in a memory for
later recall.
• The procedure is the same as for MULTI
EFFECT. (Refer to page 42.)
43
QQTG0692
Sounds and effects
REVERB
06_Part I.fm 44 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分
Part I
Sounds and effects
MIC
You can add reverb and other effects to sound
from a connected microphone.
3. Select MIC REVERB & EFFECT.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• Connect a microphone to this instrument.
(Refer to page 188.)
1. Set the PROGRAM MENUS button to ON.
PROGRAM
MENUS
Sounds and effects
4. Set using the button on the left of the display.
• The display will appear as follows:
Select the effect name (MIC REVERB/MIC
EFFECT).
5. Set the MIC REVERB.
• Use the PARAMETER ▲ and ▼ buttons to
select an attribute, and use the VALUE ∧ and
∨ buttons to adjust the corresponding setting.
• You can specify whether or not to apply the
reverb with the MIC REV ON/OFF button.
6. Set MIC EFFECT.
2. Select REVERB & EFFECT.
44
QQTG0692
• Use the PARAMETER ▲ and ▼ buttons to
select an attribute, and use the VALUE ∧ and
∨ buttons to adjust the corresponding setting.
• Enable or disable the effect using the MIC
EFF ON/OFF button.
06_Part I.fm 45 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分
Part I
Sounds and effects
Controller
Use the controllers (left next to the keyboard) to change the nuance of the sound while you are playing.
PITCH BEND
MODULATION (KN2600)
The pitch of the instrument can be continuously
changed with the PITCH BEND wheel at the left
end of the keyboard. Using this control, you can
produce the effect of bending the strings on a
guitar.
The MODULATION wheel is used to apply a
vibrato effect, for example, to the sound.
While pressing a key on the keyboard, move the
wheel up to add the effect.
MODULATION
MAX
PITCH BEND
UP
MIN
DOWN
• When you release your hand from the wheel, it
returns automatically to the center position
and the pitch bend effect is turned off.
• The pitch bend effect does not function for the
AUTO PLAY CHORD accompaniment pattern
or during a normal performance for the sounds
of the LEFT part.
• The amount of pitch bend can be set. (Refer to
page 149.)
• When this effect is not needed, set the MODULATION wheel to the MIN position.
• This effect differs depending on the selected
sound.
• The vibrato effect does not function for the
AUTO PLAY CHORD accompaniment pattern
or during a normal performance for the sounds
of the LEFT part.
45
QQTG0692
Sounds and effects
While pressing a key on the keyboard, move the
wheel up and down to control the pitch.
06_Part I.fm 46 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分
Part I
Sounds and effects
Transpose
Sounds and effects
The TRANSPOSE buttons are used to change the key of the entire instrument in semi-tone steps across
an entire octave.
Suppose you learn to play a song—in the key of C, for example—and decide you want to sing it, only to
find that it’s either too high or too low for your voice. Your choice is to either learn the song all over again
in a different key, or to use the TRANSPOSE feature.
TRANSPOSE
–
+
Adjust the key with the + and – buttons.
• The key is changed in half-tone increments up
to plus or minus one octave.
• If the two buttons are pressed at the same
time, the key returns to C.
• When the TRANSPOSE function is active, the
transposed key is shown on the HOME PAGE
display.
<Example: transposed to D>
Played keys
C major
Notes that sound
D major
46
QQTG0692
06_Part I.fm 47 ページ
2003年2月5日 水曜日 午後2時38分
Part I
Sounds and effects
Techni-chord
TECHNI-CHORD turns your single note melodies into full chords and offers you a choice of different types
from a simple duet which adds one harmony note to your melody note, to big band reeds which adds four
harmony notes to your melody note. If TECHNI-CHORD is part of a ONE TOUCH PLAY or MUSIC
STYLIST registration, a suitable TECHNI-CHORD type will be selected automatically.
C
D
G
C
Right hand (melody)
1. Split the keyboard into left and right sections.
Type setting
2. Press the TECHNI-CHORD button to turn it
1. Press and hold the TECHNI-CHORD button
on.
for a few seconds.
• The display looks similar to the following.
TECHNICHORD
3. Play the keyboard.
• The melody you play with your right hand is
automatically played in chords which are
based on the chords you play with your left
hand.
• This feature is very effective when used with
the AUTO PLAY CHORD.
2. Use the 䊴, ▲, ▼,
䊳 buttons to select the har-
mony style.
• When the OCTAVE, HARD ROCK or FANFARE style is selected, the TECHNI-CHORD
functions even when the keyboard is not split.
䡲 ORCHESTRATOR
You can specify which part is used for the harmony tones. Your TECHNI-CHORD performance is enhanced by selecting harmony
sounds different from the sounds you play and
the sounds produced by the automatic accompaniment.
• In the case of EASY RECORD (see page 77),
when set to CONDUCTOR or a part other than
PART 4, the TECHNI-CHORD sound is not
recorded; so when you use EASY RECORD,
please set to one or the other.
1. Use the ORCHESTRATOR ∧ and ∨ buttons
to select the part for the harmony notes.
• If CONDUCTOR is selected, the harmony
notes are produced in the sounds of the part
which is currently selected in the CONDUCTOR (RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2). In other words, the
harmony notes are produced in the same
sound as the melody notes. If both RIGHT 1
and RIGHT 2 are on, the harmony notes are
produced in the sound of the RIGHT 1 part.
47
QQTG0692
Sounds and effects
Example:
Left hand (chord)
Download PDF

advertising